Ii I NT

Course File On
Network Theory
By
Mrs.CH.Hima Bindu Sagarika

Assistant Professor,
Electrical & Electronics Engineering
K.G. Reddy College of Engineering and Technology
2018-2019
HOD Principal
EEE KGRCET
1
COURSE FILE
Subject Name : Network Theory
Faculty Name : CH. Hima Bindu sagarika
Designation : Assistant Professor
Regulation /
Course Code : R16/EE304ES
Year / Semester : II / Ist
Department : Electrical & Electronics
Engineering
Academic Year : 2018-19
COURSE FILE CONTENTS
2
PART-1
S.N. Topics Page No.
1 Vision, Mission, PEO’s, PO’s& PSOs
2 Syllabus (University Copy)
3 Course Objectives, Course Outcomes and Topic Outcomes
6 Course Prerequisites
5 CO’s, PO’s Mapping
6 Course Information Sheet (CIS)
a). Course Description
b). Syllabus
c). Gaps in Syllabus
d). Topics beyond syllabus
e). Web Sources-References
f). Delivery / Instructional Methodologies
g). Assessment Methodologies-Direct
h). Assessment Methodologies –Indirect
i). Text books & Reference books
7 Micro Lesson Plan
8 Teaching Schedule
9 Unit wise Hand written Notes
10 OHP/LCD SHEETS /CDS/DVDS/PPT (Soft/Hard copies)
11 University Previous Question papers
12 MID exam Descriptive Question Papers with Key
13 MID exam Objective Question papers with Key
16 Assignment topics with materials
15 Tutorial topics and Questions
16 Unit wise-Question bank
1 Two marks question with answers 5 questions
2 Three marks question with answers 5 questions
3 Five marks question with answers 5 questions
6 Objective question with answers 10 questions
5 Fill in the blanks question with answers 10 questions
17 Beyond syllabus Topics with material
18 Result Analysis-Remedial/Corrective Action
19 Record of Tutorial Classes
20 Record of Remedial Classes
21 Record of guest lecturers conducted
3
PART-2
S.NO. Topics
1 Attendance Register/Teacher Log Book
2 Time Table
3 Academic Calendar
4 Continuous Evaluation-marks (Test, Assignments etc)
5 Status Request internal Exams and Syllabus coverage
6 Teaching Diary/Daily Delivery Record
7 Continuous Evaluation – MID marks
8 Assignment Evaluation- marks /Grades
9 Special Descriptive Tests Marks
10 Sample students descriptive answer sheets
11 Sample students assignment sheets
4
1. VISION, MISSION, PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES
(A) VISION
To become a renowned department imparting both technical and non-technical skills to the
students by implementing new engineering pedagogy’s and research to produce competent new
age electrical engineers.
(B) MISSION
• To transform the students into motivated and knowledgeable new age electrical engineers.
• To advance the quality of education to produce world class technocrats with an ability to
adapt to the academically challenging environment.
• To provide a progressive environment for learning through organized teaching methodologies,

contemporary curriculum and research in the thrust areas of electrical engineering.
(C) PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

PEO 1: Apply knowledge and skills to provide solutions to Electrical and Electronics
Engineering problems in industry and governmental organizations or to enhance student
learning in educational institutions
PEO 2: Work as a team with a sense of ethics and professionalism, and communicate
effectively to manage cross-cultural and multidisciplinary teams
PEO 3: Update their knowledge continuously through lifelong learning that contributes to
personal, global and organizational growth
(D) PROGRAM OUTCOMES
PO 1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
PO 2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural science and engineering sciences.
PO 3: Design/development of solutions: design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal and environmental
considerations.
PO 4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: use research based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
PO 5: Modern tool usage: create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
5
PO 6: The engineer and society: apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
PO 7: Environment sustainability: understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in the societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
PO 8: Ethics: apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of the engineering practice.
PO 9: Individual and team work: function effectively as an individual and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO 10: Communication: communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with

the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and
receive clear instructions.
PO 11: Project management and finance: demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO 12: Lifelong learning: recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and lifelong learning in the broader context of technological change.
(E) PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

PSO-1: Apply the engineering fundamental knowledge to identify, formulate, design and
investigate complex engineering problems of electric circuits, power electronics, electrical
machines and power systems and to succeed in competitive exams like GATE, IES, GRE, OEFL,
GMAT, etc.
PSO-2: Apply appropriate techniques and modern engineering hardware and software tools in
power systems and power electronics to engage in life-long learning and to get an employment in
the field of Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
PSO-3: Understand the impact of engineering solutions in societal and environmental context,
commit to professional ethics and communicate effectively.
6
2. SYLLABUS (University Copy)
NETWORK THEORY
JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

HYDERABAD.
L/T/P/C
Course Code: EE303ES 4/1/0/4
UNIT – I
Magnetic Circuits: Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction – concept of self and mutual inductance
– dot convention – coefficient of coupling – composite magnetic circuit – Analysis of series and parallel
magnetic circuits Network topology: Definitions– Graph – Tree, Basic cutset and Basic Tieset matrices
for planar networks – Loop and Nodal methods of analysis of Networks with dependent & independent
voltage and current sources – Duality & Dual networks.
UNIT – II
Three phase circuits: Phase sequence – Star and delta connection – Relation between line and phase
voltages and currents in balanced systems – Analysis of balanced and Unbalanced
3 phase circuits – Measurement of active and reactive power.
UNIT – III
Transient Analysis: Transient response of R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits (Series and Parallel
combinations) for D.C. and sinusoidal excitations – Initial conditions – Classical method and Laplace
transforms methods of solutions. Transient response of the above circuits for different inputs such as step,
ramp, pulse and impulse by using Laplace transforms method.
UNIT – IV
Network Parameters: Network functions driving point and transfer impedance function
networks- poles and zeros –necessary conditions for driving point function and for transfer function Two
port network parameters – Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters and their relations– 2- port network
parameters using transformed variables.
UNIT – V
Filters: Introduction to filters –low pass – high pass and band pass – RC, RL, filters- constant K and m
derived filters and composite filter design
TEXT BOOKS
• “William Hayt and Jack E. Kemmerly”, “Engineering circuit analysis”, Mc Graw Hill Company, 6th
edition, 2016.
• “D. Roy Chowdary”, “Networks and systems”, New age international publishers, 2009.
• “N. C. Jagan & C. Lakshminarayana”, “Network Theory”, B.S Publications, 2014.
• “A. Chakrabarthy”, Circuit Theory, Dhanpat Rai, 2005.

7
REFERENCE BOOKS:
• “Van Valkenburg”, “Network Analysis”, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2014
• “Franklin F Kuo,” “Network Analysis & Synthesis”, Wiley India PVT. Ltd., second Edition, 2006
• “K.C. A. Smith & R. E. Alley”, “Electrical Circuits”, Cambridge University Press, 1992
• “K. Rajeswaran”, “Electric Circuit theory”, Pearson Education, 2004.
• “A. Bruce Carlson”, “Circuits”, Thomson Publishers, 1999
8
3. COURSE OBJECTIVES, COURSE OUTCOMES AND TOPIC
OUTCOMES
(A). COURSE OBJECTIVES
➢ To understand Magnetic Circuits, Network Topology and Three phase circuits.
➢ To analyze transients in Electrical systems.
➢ To evaluate Network parameters of given Electrical network
➢ To design basic filter configurations
(B). COURSE OUTCOMES

After this course, the student will be able to
➢ Analyze the Electrical Circuits with the concept of Network topology
➢ Apply the concepts of Magnetic circuit & Analyze Magnetic circuits
➢ Determine self and mutually induced EMF’s for Magnetically coupled coils
➢ Understand the importance of three phase circuits and Analyze the three phase circuits with Star
& Delta connected balanced and unbalanced loads
➢ Analyze the transient behavior of electrical networks for various excitations
➢ Obtain the various network parameters for the given two port networks
➢ Represent the transfer function for the given network
➢ Determine the parameters for the design of various filters
9
(C). TOPIC OUTCOMES
TOPIC OUTCOMES
S.N. TOPIC TOPIC OUTCOMES
Unit-I
1 Introduction to COURSE About course
2 Unit I: Introduction- Student is able to know the faradays laws
Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic
induction
3 Concept of self and mutual An ability to understand the concept of self
inductance and mutual inductance
4 Dot convention & coefficient of Student is able to Know the Dot convention
coupling and Problems & coefficient of coupling and Problems
5 Composite magnetic circuit - Student analyze the concept of Composite

Analysis of series and parallel magnetic circuit
magnetic circuits
6 Network Topology - Definitions – Studentcan understand the Definitions –
Graph – Tree, Basic cut-set and Graph – Tree, Basic cut-set and Basic Tie-set
Basic Tie-set matrices for planar matrices for planar networks
networks
9 Loop and Nodal methods ofs analysis
Loop Student will analyze the loop and nodal
of Networks with dependent &
independent voltage and current methods
sources
11 Duality &Dual networks and
Student will know the calculations of duality and dual
Problems
networks
Unit-II
12 Three phase circuits: Phase Student will know the concept of three phase
sequence circuit and its phase sequence
13 Star and delta connection – Relation An ability to understand the star and delta
between line and phase voltages and
currents in balanced systems connection and the relation
between line phase voltages
14 Star and delta connection –An
Relation
ability to understand the star and delta connection and
between line and phase voltages and the relation between line phase voltages
currents in balanced systems
10
15 Analysis of balanced and Student will analyze the balanced and
Unbalanced 3 phase circuits
unbalanced three phase
circuit
16 Analysis of balanced andStudent will analyze the balanced and unbalanced
Unbalanced 3 phase circuits
three phase circuit
17 Measurement of active and reactive Student will understand the measurement of
power
active and reactive power
18 Measurement of active andStudent
reactive
will understand the measurement of active and
power reactive power
19 Problems Student will learn the problems
20 Problems Student will learn the problems
Unit-III
21 Transient Analysis: Introduction,Student can Transient Response of RL circuit

Transient response of R-L (series
and parallel) circuit for DC and AC
excitation-using classical method
and Laplace Transforms
22 Transient response of R-L (series Student can Transient Response of RL circuit
and parallel) circuit for DC and AC
excitation-using classical method
23 Transient response of R-L (series and Student can Transient Response of RL circuit
parallel) circuit for DC and AC
excitation-using classical method and
Laplace Transforms
24 Transient response of R-C circuit Student can Transient Response of RC circuit
for DC and AC excitation using
classical method and Laplace
Transforms
25 Transient response of R-C circuit Student can Transient Response of RC circuit
for DC and AC excitation using
classical method and Laplace
Transforms
26 Transient response of R-L-C Student can Transient Response of RLC
circuit for DC and AC excitation
circuit
using classical method and Laplace
Transforms
circuit for DC and AC excitation circuit
11
Transforms
circuits for different inputs such as
circuit
step, ramp by using Laplace
transforms method
circuits for different inputs such as
circuit Using Laplace
step, ramp by using Laplace
transforms method Transforms methods
30 Problems on Transient response of An ability to do the calculations on RL RC

R-L, R-C, and R-L-C circuits by
RLC Circuit
using Laplace transforms method
Unit-IV
31 NETWORK FUNCTIONS: Student will understand the network

Network functions, driving point
functions driving point and
and transfer impedance function
networks transfer impedance function
32 Poles and zerosand Necessary Student will know the necessary condition
conditions for driving point
for driving point function
function and for transfer function
33 NETWORK PARAMETERS: Student will know the network parameters
Two port network parameters- Z,
Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters
34 Two port network parameters- Z, Y, Student will know the -Z Y ABCD and
ABCD and hybrid parameters
hybrid parameters
35 Z, Y, ABCD and hybridWill know the relations of parameters

parameters and their relations
36 Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters Will know the relations of parameters

and their relations
37 Concept of transformed network-
An ability to understand the concept of transformed
Two port network parameters network
using transformed variables
12
38 Concept of transformed network- An ability to understand the concept of Two
Two port network parameters
port network
using transformed variables
Unit-V
39 Unit-V: FILTERS: Introduction Student will know the concept of filters
to filters and classification
40 Low pass, high pass filtersAn ability to the understand the low pass and high pass
filters
41 Band pass and Band stop filters An ability to the understand the Band pass
and Band stop filters
42 Constant K filters Will understand the constant K filters
43 Constant K filters Will understand the constant K filters
44 m derived filters Will understand the M derived filters
45 m derived filters Will understand the M derived filters
46 Composite filter design Will understand the Composite Filters Design
47 Composite filter design Will understand the Composite Filters Design
13
4. COURSE PREREQUISITES
1. Mathematics-II
2. Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering
14
5. CO’S, PO’S MAPPING
CO&PO Mappings
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
15
6. COURSE INFORMATION SHEET
6. A). COURSE DESCRIPTION:

PROGRAMME: B. Tech. (Electrical & Electronics DEGREE: B. Tech
Engineering.)
COURSE: NETWORK THEORY YEAR: II SEM: I CREDITS: 3
COURSE CODE: EE304ES COURSE TYPE: CORE
REGULATION: R16
COURSE AREA/DOMAIN: …. CONTACT HOURS: 3+0 (L+T)) hours/Week.
CORRESPONDING LAB COURSE CODE (IF ANY): LAB COURSE NAME:Networks Lab
EE307ES
6. B). SYLLABUS:
Unit Details Hours

Magnetic Circuits – Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction – concept
of self and mutual inductance – dot convention – coefficient of coupling –
composite magnetic circuit - Analysis of series and parallel magnetic
circuits.
I 11
Network Topology - Definitions – Graph – Tree, Basic cutset and Basic Tie
set matrices for planar networks – Loop and Nodal methods of analysis of
Networks with dependent & independent voltage and current sources -
Duality & Dual networks.
Three Phase Circuits- Phase sequence – Star and delta connection–
Relation between line and phase voltages and currents in balanced systems –
II 9
Analysis of balanced and Unbalanced 3 phase circuits – Measurement of
active and reactive power.
Transient Analysis - Transient response of R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits
(Series and Parallel combinations) for d.c. and sinusoidal excitations –
Initial conditions – Classical method and Laplace transform methods of
III 10
solutions
Transient response of the above circuits for different inputs such as step,
ramp, pulse and impulse by using Laplace transforms method.
Network Parameters- Network functions, driving point and transfer
impedance function networks- poles and zeros –necessary conditions for
IV driving point function and for transfer function; 8
Two port network parameters – Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters and
their relations– 2 -port network parameters using transformed variables.
Filters: Introduction to filters –low pass – high pass and band pass –RC , RL
V filters- constant K and m derived filters and composite filter design 9
Contact classes for syllabus coverage 47

Lectures beyond syllabus 03
Tutorial classes 0
Classes for gaps &Add-on classes 02
Total No. of classes 52
16
6. C. GAPS IN THE SYLLABUS - TO MEET INDUSTRY/PROFESSION REQUIREMENTS:
S.NO. DESCRIPTION PROPOSEDACTIONS
1 Human Factors Engineering: Study of human machine 1 period (Class Room)

interaction
2 Motors and Drivers: Electric, Air, Hydraulic motors, 2 periods (Class Room)
and solenoids
6. D). TOPICS BEYOND SYLLABUS/ADVANCED TOPICS:

1 The Effect of Symmetry on the Fourier Coefficients
Guest Lecture
4. E). WEB SOURCE REFERENCES:
Sl. Name of book/ website

No.
a. nptel.ac.in/courses/112104121/1
b. www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/kinematics-of-machines.html
c. ebooks.library.cornell.edu/k/kmoddl/pdf/016_002.pdf
6. F). DELIVERY/INSTRUCTIONAL METHODOLOGIES:
 CHALK & TALK  STUD. ASSIGNMENT  WEB RESOURCES

 LCD/SMART BOARDS  STUD. SEMINARS ☐ ADD-ON COURSES
6. G). ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGIES-DIRECT
 ASSIGNMENTS  STUD.  TESTS/MODEL  UNIV.
17
SEMINARS EXAMS EXAMINATION
☐ STUD. LAB ☐ STUD. VIVA ☐ MINI/MAJOR ☐
PRACTICES PROJECTS CERTIFICATIONS
☐ ADD-ON ☐ OTHERS
COURSES
6. H). ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGIES-INDIRECT

 ASSESSMENT OF COURSE OUTCOMES  STUDENT FEEDBACK ON
(BY FEEDBACK, ONCE) FACULTY (TWICE)
☐ASSESSMENT OF MINI/MAJOR PROJECTS ☐ OTHERS
BY EXT. EXPERTS
18
7. MICRO LESSON PLAN
S.No. Topic Scheduled date Actual date
Unit-I
1 Introduction to COURSE
2 Unit I: Introduction-
Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction
3 Concept of self and mutual inductance
4 Dot convention & coefficient of coupling

and Problems
5 Composite magnetic circuit - Analysis of
series and parallel magnetic circuits
6 Network Topology - Definitions – Graph –
Tree, Basic cut-set and Basic Tie-set
matrices for planar networks
9 Loop and Nodal methods of analysis of
Networks with dependent & independent
voltage and current sources
10 Loop and Nodal methods of analysis of
Networks with dependent & independent
voltage and current sources
11 Duality & Dual networks and Problems
Unit-II
12 Three phase circuits: Phase sequence
13 Star and delta connection – Relation

currents in balanced systems 19
14 Star and delta connection – Relation
currents in balanced systems
15 Analysis of balanced and Unbalanced 3
phase circuits
16 Analysis of balanced and Unbalanced 3
phase circuits
17 Measurement of active and reactive power
18 Measurement of active and reactive power
19 Problems
20 Problems
Unit-III
21 Transient Analysis: Introduction, Transient

response of R-L (series and parallel) circuit
for DC and AC excitation-using classical
method and Laplace Transforms
22 Transient response of R-L (series and
parallel) circuit for DC and AC excitation-
Transforms
23 Transient response of R-L (series and
parallel) circuit for DC and AC excitation-
Transforms
24 Transient response of R-C circuit for DC
and AC excitation using classical method
25 Transient response of R-C circuit for DC
26 Transient response of R-L-C circuit for DC
27 Transient response of R-L-C circuit for DC
28 Transient response of R-L-C circuits for
different inputs such as step, ramp by using
Laplace transforms method
29 Transient response of R-L-C circuits for
different inputs such as step, ramp by using
Laplace transforms method
30 Problems on Transient response of R-L, R-
C, and R-L-C circuits by using Laplace
transforms method
20
Unit-IV
31 NETWORK FUNCTIONS: Network

functions, driving point and transfer
impedance function networks
32 Poles and zeros and Necessary conditions
for driving point function and for transfer
function
33 NETWORK PARAMETERS:
Two port network parameters- Z, Y, ABCD
and hybrid parameters
34 Two port network parameters- Z, Y, ABCD
and hybrid parameters
35 Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters and
their relations
36 Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters and
their relations
37 Concept of transformed network- Two port
network parameters using transformed
variables
38 Concept of transformed network- Two port
network parameters using transformed
variables
Unit-V
39 Unit-V: FILTERS: Introduction to filters

and classification
40 Low pass, high pass filters
41 Band pass and Band stop filters
42 Constant K filters
43 Constant K filters
44 m derived filters
45 m derived filters
46 Composite filter design
47 Composite filter design
21
8. TEACHING SCHEDULE
Subject NETWORK THEORY

Text Books (to be purchased by the Students)
Book 1 Engineering Circuit Analysis / William Hayt and Jack E. Kimmerly / McGraw Hill
Company/6thEdiction/2016
Book 2 Networks and Systems/D. Roy Chowdary / New Age International Publishers/2009
Book 3 Network Theory/NC Jagan& C Lakshminarayana/BS Publications/2014
Book 4 Circuit Theory/A Chakrabarthy/DhanpatRai Publications.2005
Chapters Nos No of
Unit Topic classes
Book 1 Book 2 Book 3 Book 4
Introduction to Network Theory 1
I Magnetic Circuits 1 1 1 4
Network Topology 1 1 2 6
II Three Phase Circuits 2 2 3 9
Transient Analysis (DC) 7 6 4 5

III
Transient Analysis (AC) 7 6 5
Network Functions 8 7 9 2
IV
Two port Network Parameters 8 7 9 6
Filters 9 10 10 4
V Design of filters
9 11 11 5
Contact classes for syllabus coverage 47
Tutorial classes 00
Gaps in the syllabus 02
Topics beyond syllabus / advanced topics 03
Total No. of classes 52
22
10. PPT (SOFT/HARD COPIES)
Electrical current flowing along a wire creates a

magnetic field around the wire, as shown in Fig.
That magnetic field can be visualized by showing
lines of magnetic flux, which are represented with
the symbol φ.
The direction of that field that can be
determined using the “right hand rule”
23
24
25
Consider two coils having N1 and N2 number of turns placed near each other as
shown in Fig
Similarly, if we calculate the induced EMF in coil 1, due to change in current

in coil 2, we can find the induced EMF e1 in coil 1 as
Now, multiplying the expression for M as in (iii) and (iv) above,
26
Due to mutual inductance, the EMF induced in coil 1 due to
change in current in coil 2 and vice versa are expressed as Thus, equating the expression for ‘e’ ,the total EMFs as
EMF induced in coil 1 due to change in current in coil 2 is
Now let the total equivalent inductance of the single circuit coil 1 and coil 2 as When the coils are differentially connected,
they are connected as in be ‘Le’
The EMF induced in the whole circuit will, therefore, be
Dot convention is used to determine the sign of induced voltage
Note:
If we use dot convention, it will not be required to know the way
the coils have been actually wound.
Node:-A node is a point in a circuit where two or more Loop:- A loop is a complete path, i.e., it starts at a
circuit elements join. selected
Example a,b, c, d, e, f and g node, traces a set of connected basic circuit
elements and
Essential Node:-A node that joins three or more returns to the original starting node without
elements. passing through
Example b, c,e and g any intermediate node more than once.
Example a b e d c a, a b e g f c a, c d e b g f c, etc.
Branch:- A branch is a path that connects two nodes.
Mesh:- A mesh is a special type of loop, i.e., it does
Example:V1,R1,R2,R3,V2,R4,R5,R6,R7 and I
not
contain any other loops within it.
Essential branch:- Those paths that connect essential Example a b e d c a, c d e g f c, g e b g (through R7
nodes ) and g
without passing through an essential node. e b g (through / )
Example c–a–b, c–d–e, c–f–g, b–e, e–g, b–g (through
R7 ), and Oriented Graph:- A graph whose branches are
b–g (through / ) oriented is
called a directed or oriented graph.
27
Subgraph:- A subgraph is a subset of the
branches and
nodes of a graph. The subgraph is said to be
proper if it
consists of strictly less than all the branches
and nodes of
the graph.
Path:- A path is a particular sub graph where only

two
branches are incident at every node except the
internal
nodes (i.e., starting and finishing nodes). At the
internal
nodes, only one branch is incident.
Links and Co-tree

If a graph for a network is known and a particular tree
is specified, the remaining branches are referred to as
the links. The collection of links is called a co-tree. So,
co-tree is the complement of a tree. These are shown
by dotted lines in Fig. (b).
28
Properties of a Tree
1. In a tree, there exists one and only one path
between any
pairs of nodes.
2. Every connected graph has at least one tree.
3. A tree contains all the nodes of the graph.
4. There is no closed path in a tree and hence, tree is

The branches of a co-tree may or may not be circuit less.
connected, whereas the branches of a tree are
always connected. 5. The rank of a tree is (n– 1).
Aij = 1, if branch j is associated with node i and oriented

INCIDENCE MATRIX [A a ] away from node i.
The incidence matrix symbolically describes a Aij = –1, if branch j is associated with node i and
network. It also oriented towards Node i.
facilitates the testing and identification of the
independent variables. Incidence matrix is a matrix Aij = 0, if branch j is not associated with node i.
which represents a graph uniquely.
This matrix tells us which branches are incident at which
For a given graph with n nodes and b branches, the nodes and what are the orientations relative to the
complete nodes.
incidence matrix Aa is a rectangular matrix of order n
Properties of Complete Incidence Matrix
× b,
whose elements have the following values. 1. The sum of the entries in any column is zero.
2. The determinant of the incidence matrix of a closed
Number of columns in [Aa] = Number of branches = b loop is zero.
Number of rows in [Aa] = Number of nodes = n 3. The rank of incidence matrix of a connected graph is
(n–1).
29
Fig.1
For a graph,having n nodes and b branches the
complete loop matrix or circuit matrix.Ba is a
rectangular matrix of order b columns And as many
rows as there are loops the graph has.Its elements
have the following values.
bij=1 if branch j is in loop I and their orientations coincide.
bij=-1,if branch j is in loop I and their orientations donot coincide.
bij=O, if branch j is not in loop i.
30
31
Generalized Equations in Matrix Forms for Circuits
Having Sources
Node Equations
the node equations become
where, Y = AY
AT b is called the nodal admittance
matrix of the order of (n – 1) × (n – 1). The above
equation
represents a set of (n – 1) number of equations,
known as node
equations.
Mesh Equations
the mesh equations become
where, Z is the /loop-impedance matrix of the order

of (b – n +
1) × (b –n + 1). The above equation represents a set
of
(b – n + 1) number of equations, known as mesh or
loop equations.
Cut-set Equations
the cut-set equations become
where, Yc is the cut-set admittance matrix of the

order of
(n – 1) × (n – 1) and the set of (n – 1) equations
represented by the above equation is known as cut-
set equations.
32
33
DELTA CONNECTED SOURCES Convert to an equivalent Y connection
Vab = VL0   V
 Van = L  − 30
Vbc = VL − 120   3


Vca = VL120  V = VL  − 150
bn
 3
Vab = 3 | V p | 30  VL
Vcn = 3 90

Van lags Vab by 30 Example
Vab = 20860  Van = 12030
 
Vbc = 208 − 60  Vbn = 120 − 90
Relationship between
phase and line voltages Vca = 208180  V = 120150
 cn
34
Consider the simple charge up circuit below.
R
When the switch is closed
i C we can say that:
V
i  R + Vc = V
dVc
The equation for a capacitor is i=C
dt
dVc
Giving us: CR + Vc = V
dt
This is called a first order linear equation with constant
coefficients.
If we want to know Vc we cannot solve it using simple
circuit theory, but it can be solved using some knowledge
of Calculus.
Transient Responses (Laplace
Transforms)
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
11. UNIVERSITY PREVIOUS QUESTION
PAPERS
48
49
12. MID EXAM DESCRIPTIVE QUESTION PAPERS
College Code
K. G. Reddy College of Engineering &Technology
(Approved by AICTE, Affiliated to JNTUH)
QM
Chilkur (Vil), Moinabad (Mdl), RR District
Name of the Exam: I Mid Examinations, SEP – 2018 Marks: 10
Year-Sem & Branch: II-I EEE Duration: 60 Min
Date &
Subject: NETWORK THEORY FN
Session
Answer ANY TWO of the following Questions 2X5=10
1. A) Write short notes on

i) Self inductance
ii) Mutual inductance
B) Explain the Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction?
2. A) Define the following terms
i) Transient response
ii) Steady state response
B) Derive the expression for response of an R-L series circuit for DC excitation?
3. A) Discuss the following
i) Star connection, voltage-current relationships with the help of phasor-diagram
ii) Delta connection, voltage-current relationships with the help of phasor-diagram
B) A balanced three-phase delta connected load of (2+j3) ohm/phase is connected to a balanced
three-phase 440V supply. The phase current is 10A. Find the total active power, reactive power and
apparent power in the circuit.
4. A) How do you measure the three-phase reactive power by using one wattmeter method?
B) The two wattmeter method is used to measure power in a three-phase load. The wattmeter readings
are 400 W and -35 W. Calculate total active power, reactive power and power factor?
50
College Code
K. G. Reddy College of Engineering &Technology
(Approved by AICTE, Affiliated to JNTUH)
QM
Chilkur (Vil), Moinabad (Mdl), RR District
Name of the Exam: II Mid Examinations, SEP - 2018 Marks: 10
Year-Sem &
II-I EEE Duration: 60 Min
Branch:
Date &
Subject: NETWORK THEORY FN
Session
Answer ANY TWO of the following Questions 2X5=10
1. Derive the expression for transient response of RLC series circuit for AC excitation?
2. Find Z-parameters and y-parameters of the network shown in figure below?
3. A) Obtain the driving point impedance of the network shown in figure below?
B) Write short notes on poles and zeros and locate the poles and zeros of the above network in the
complex plain?
4. What is a filter? Give applications of filters and discuss their classifications?
51
13. MID EXAM OBJECTIVE QUESTION PAPERS
UNIT-I
MAGNETIC CIRCUITS & NETWORK TOPOLOGY
1. Calculate the emf of a coil with turns 100 and flux rate 5 units.
a)20
b) -20
c) 500
d) -500
Answer: d
Explanation: The emf is the product of the turns of the coil and the flux rate. Thus e = -N dφ/dt, where the
negative sign indicates that the emf induced is opposing the flux. Thus e = -100 x 5 = -500 units.
2. The equivalent inductances of two coils 2H and 5H in series aiding flux with mutual inductance of 3H is
a) 10
b) 30
c) 1
d) 13
Answer: d
Explanation: The equivalent inductance of two coils in series is given by L = L1 + L2 + 2M, where L1 and L2
are the self inductances and M is the mutual inductance. Thus L = 2 + 5 + 2(3) = 13H.
3. The expression for the inductance in terms of turns, flux and current is given by
a) L = N dφ/di
b) L = -N dφ/di
c) L = Niφ
d) L = Nφ/i
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: We know that e = -N dφ/dt and also e = -L di/dt. On equating both we get, L = Ndφ/di is the
expression for inductance.
52
4. The equivalent inductance of two coils with series opposing flux having inductances 7H and 2H with a
mutual inductance of 1H.
a) 10
b) 7
c) 11
d) 13
Answer: b
Explanation: The equivalent inductance of two coils in series with opposing flux is L = L1 + L2 – 2M, where
L1 and L2 are the self inductances and M is the mutual inductance. Thus L = 7 + 2 – 2(1) = 7H.
5. A coil is said to be loosely coupled with which of the following conditions?

a) K>1
b) K<1
c) K>0.5
d) K<0.5
Answer: d
Explanation: k is the coefficient of coupling. It lies between 0 and 1. For loosely coupled coil, the coefficient
of coupling will be very less. Thus the condition K<0.5 is true.
6. A graph is said to be a directed graph if ________ of the graph has direction.

a) 1 branch
b) 2 branches
c) 3 branches
d) every branch
Answer: d
Explanation: If every branch of the graph has direction, then the graph is said to be a directed graph. If the
graph does not have any direction then that graph is called undirected graph.
7. The number of branches incident at the node of a graph is called?

a) degree of the node
b) order of the node
53
c) status of the node
d) number of the node
Answer: a
Explanation: Nodes can be incident to one or more elements. The number of branches incident at the node of a
graph is called degree of the node.
8. If no two branches of the graph cross each other, then the graph is called?
a) directed graph
b) undirected graph
c) planar graph
d) non-planar graph
Answer: c
Explanation: If a graph can be drawn on a plane surface such that no two branches of the graph cross each
other, then the graph is called planar graph .
9. Consider the graph given below. Which of the following is a not a tree to the graph?
a)
b)
c)
54
d)
Answer: d
Explanation: Tree is sub graph which consists of all node of original graph but no closed paths. So, ‘d’ is not a
tree to the graph.
10. Number of twigs in a tree are? n- number of nodes

a) n
b) n+1
c) n-1
d) n-2
Answer: c
Explanation: Twig is a branch in a tree. Number of twigs in a tree are n-1. If there are 4 nodes in a tree then
number of possible twigs are 3.
11. Loops which contain only one link are independent are called?
a) open loops
b) closed loops
c) basic loops
d) none of the above
Answer: c
Explanation: The addition of subsequent link forms one or more addition al loops. Loops which contain only
one link are independent are called basic loops.
12. If the incident matrix of a graph is given below. The corresponding graph is?
abcdef
1 +1 0 +1 0 0 +1
2 -1 -1 0 +1 0 0
3 0 +1 0 0 +1 -1
4 0 0 -1 -1 -1 0
55
a)
b)
c)
d)
Answer: b
Explanation: For the given incidence matrix,

abcdef
1 +1 0 +1 0 0 +1
2 -1 -1 0 +1 0 0
3 0 +1 0 0 +1 -1
4 0 0 -1 -1 -1 0
the corresponding graph is ‘b’ considering the directions specified in the graph.
13. If A represents incidence matrix, I represents branch current vectors, then?
a) AI = 1
b) AI = 0
c) AI = 2
d) AI= 3
56
Answer: b
Explanation: If A represents incidence matrix, I represents branch current vectors, then the relation is AI= 0
that is its characteristic equation must be equated to zero..
14. If a graph consists of 5 nodes, then the number of twigs in the tree are?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: d
Explanation: Number of twigs= n-1. As given number of nodes are 5 then n = 5. On substituting in the
equation, number of twigs =5 -1 = 4.
15. If there are 4 branches, 3 nodes then number of links in a co-tree are?
a) 2
b) 4
c) 6
d) 8
Answer: a
Explanation: Number of links = b-n+1. Given number of branches = 4 and number of nodes = 3. On
substituting in the equation, number of links in a co-tree = 4 – 3 + 1 = 2.
16. The current in a closed path in a loop is called?

a) loop current
b) branch current
c) link current
d) twig current
Answer: c
Explanation: In a loop there exists a closed path and a circulating current which is called link current. The
current in any branch can be found by using link currents.
57
17. Tie-set is also called?
a) f loop
b) g loop
c) d loop
d) e loop
Answer: a
Explanation: The fundamental loop formed by one link has a unique path in the tree joining the two nodes of
the link. This loop is also called f-loop.
18. Consider the graph shown below. If a tree of the graph has branches 4, 5, 6, then one of the twigs will be?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: d
Explanation: Branches of the tree are called twigs. So 4, 5, 6 are the twigs of the tree. The current in any
branch of a graph can be found by using link currents.
19. Consider the graph shown in the question 3 above. If a tree of the graph has branches 4, 5, 6, then one of
the links will be?
a) 3
58
b) 4
c) 5
d) 6
Answer: a
Explanation: The branches of the co-tree are called links. So the links will be 1, 2, 3. For a given tree of a
graph addition of each link between any two nodes form a loop called fundamental loop.
20. The loop current direction of the basic loop formed from the tree of the graph is?
a) same as the direction of the branch current
b) opposite to the direction of the link current
c) same as the direction of the link current
d) opposite to the direction of the branch current
Answer: c
Explanation: The loop current direction of the basic loop formed from the tree of the graph is same as the
direction of the link current.
UNIT-II
THREE PHASE CIRCUITS
“Polyphase ”.
1. The power generated by a machine increases _____________ percent from single phase to two phase.
a) 40.4
b) 41.4
c) 42.4
d) 43.4
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In an ac system it is possible to connect two or more number of individual circuits to a common
poly phase source. The power generated by machine increases 41.4 percent from single phase to two phase. So,
percentage increase = 41.4%.
2. The percentage of power increased from single phase to three phase is?
a) 50
b) 100
c) 150
59
d) 200
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The percentage of power increased from single phase to three phase is 50. So, percentage
increase = 50%. Beyond three phase the maximum possible increase is only seven percent but the
complications are many.
3. When the power factor is __________ the power becomes zero 100 times a second in a 50Hz supply.
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The power in a single phase circuit is pulsating. When the power factor is one, the power
becomes zero 100 times a second in a 50Hz supply. Therefore single phase motors have a pulsating torque.
4. Which motors are called self-starting motors?
a) single phase
b) two phase
c) three phase
d) four phase
View Answer
5. In three phase system, the three voltages (currents) differ in phase by __________electrical degrees from
each other in a particular sequence.
a) 30
b) 60
c) 90
d) 120
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In general a three phase system of voltages is merely a combination of three single phase systems
of voltages. In three phase system, the three voltages (currents) differ in phase by 120⁰ from each other in a
particular sequence.
6. In a two phase generator, the armature has two distinct windings that are displaced __________ apart.
a) 45⁰
b) 90⁰
c) 135⁰
60
d) 180⁰
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Single phase voltages and currents are generated by single phase generators and the armature of
such generator has only one winding or one set of coils. In a two phase generator, the armature has two distinct
windings that are displaced 90⁰ apart. θ= 90⁰.
7. In three phase system at any given instant, the algebraic sum of three voltages must be?
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: For three phase alternator the three voltages are of same magnitude and frequency. In three phase
system at any given instant, the algebraic sum of three voltages must be zero. Algebraic sum of three voltages
= 0.
8. Phase sequence depends on the?
a) field
b) rotation of the field
c) armature
d) rotation of the armature
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The sequence of voltages in the three phases undergo changes one after the other abd this is
called phase sequence. Phase sequence depends on the rotation of the field not on rotation of armature or on
field or on armature.
9. If RR‘, YY‘ and BB‘ constitutes three phase sequence if V‘RR = Vmsinωt its corresponding field magnets are in
clockwise direction, then V‘YY =?
a) Vmsinωt
b) Vmsin(ωt+120⁰)
c) Vmsin(ωt-120⁰)
d) Vmsin(ωt-240⁰)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If the field system is rotated in the anticlockwise direction, then the sequence of voltages in the
three phases are in order RBY. The value of V‘YY is V‘YY = Vmsin(ωt-120⁰).
10. The value of V‘BB in the question 9 is?
a) Vmsin(ωt-240⁰)
61
b) Vmsin(ωt-120⁰)
c) Vmsin(ωt+240⁰)
d) Vmsinωt
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The value of V‘BB is V‘BB = Vmsin(ωt-240⁰). There are only two possible phase sequences; they are
RBY and RYB.
“Inter Connection of Three-Phase Sources and Loads”.
1. In a three phase alternator, there are __________ independent phase windings or coils.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: In a three phase alternator, there are 3 independent phase windings or coils. So, 3 independent
phase windings or coils. The end connections of the three sets of the coils may be brought out of the machine
to form three separate single phase sources to feed three individual circuits.
2. Each coil in three phase alternator has ________________ number of terminals.
a) 2
b) 4
c) 6
d) 8
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Each coil in three phase alternator has 2 number of terminals, viz. start and finish. So, 2 number
of terminals. the coils are inter connected to form a wye or delta connected three phase system to achieve
economy and reduce the number of conductors and thereby the complexity of the circuit.
3. In wye or star connection, ______________ of the three phases are joined together within the alternator.
a) similar ends
b) opposite ends
c) one similar end, two opposite ends
d) one opposite end, two opposite ends
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In wye or star connection, similar ends of the three phases are joined together within the
alternator. The common terminal so formed is referred to as the neutral point or neutral terminal.
62
4. The voltage between __________ and ___________ is called phase voltage.
a) line and line
b) line and reference
c) neutral point and reference
d) line and neutral point
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In a three phase four wire star connected system, the terminals R, Y and B are called the line
terminals of the source. The voltage between line and neutral point is called phase voltage. And the voltage
between line and line is called line voltage.
5. The voltage between ______________ is called line voltage.
a) line and neutral point
b) line and reference
c) line and line
d) neutral point and reference
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The voltage between line and line is called line voltage. And the voltage between line and neutral
point is called phase voltage. The currents flowing through the phases are called the phase currents, while
those flowing in the lines are called the line currents.
6. Figure below represents three phases of an alternator. The phase voltage for the star connection among the
options given below is?
a) VRY
b) VRN
c) VYB
d) VBR
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: If the neutral wire is not available for external connection, the system is called a three phase,three
wire star connected system. Phase voltage = VRN. And VRY, VYB and VBR are not phase voltages.
7. In the figure shown above, what will be the line voltage?
a) VBR
b) VBN
c) VRN
d) VYN
View Answer
63
Answer: a
Explanation: The star connected system formed will supply equal line voltages displaced 120<sup<o<
sup=""> from one another and acting simultaneously in the cicruit like three independent single phase sources
in the same frame of a three phase alternator. Line voltage = VBR. And VRN , VYN and VBN are not line
voltages.</sup<o<>
8. In the Delta or Mesh connection, there will be __________ number of common terminals.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The three line conductors are taken from the three junctions of the mesh or delta connection to
feed the three phase load. This constitutes a three phase, three wire, delta connected system. In the Delta or
Mesh connection, there will be zero number of common terminals. Number of common terminals = 0.
9. The relation between line voltage and phase voltage in Delta or Mesh connection is?
a) Vphase > Vline
b) Vphase < Vline
c) Vphase = Vline
d) Vphase >= Vline
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: When the sources are connected in delta, loads can be connected only across the three line
terminal. The relation between line voltage and phase voltage in Delta or Mesh connection is Vphase = Vline.
10. Which of the following voltage is a phase voltage in delta connection?
a) VRN
b) VBR
c) VYN
d) VBN
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A balanced three phase source is one in which the three individual sources have equal magnitude
with 120<sup<o< sup=""> phase differences. VBR is a phase voltage in delta connection. And VRN , VYN and
VBNare not phase voltages.</sup<o<>
“Star to Delta and Delta to Star Transformation”.
1. If a resistor ZR is connected between R and N, ZBR between R and B, ZRY between R and Y and ZBY between
B and Y form a delta connection, then after transformation to star, the impedance at R is?
a) (ZBRZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
64
b) (ZRYZBR)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
c) (ZRYZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
d) (ZRY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: After transformation to star, the impedance at R is
(ZRYZBR)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR).
2. In the question above the impedance at Y is?
a) (ZRY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
b) (ZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
c) (ZRYZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
d) (ZRYZBR)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: After transformation to star, the impedance at Y is
(ZRYZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR).
3. In the question above, the impedance at B is?
a) (ZBRZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
b) (ZRYZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
c) (ZBY)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
d) (ZBR)/(ZRY+ZBY+ZBR)
View Answer
4. If the resistors of star connected system are ZR, ZY, ZB then the impedance ZRY in delta connected system will
be?
a) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZB
b) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZY
c) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZR
d) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/(ZR+ZY )
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: After transformation to delta, the impedance ZRY in delta connected system will be (ZRZY+ ZYZB+
ZBZR)/ZB.
5. If the resistors of star connected system are ZR, ZY, ZB then the impedance ZBY in delta connected system will
be?
a) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/(ZB+ZY )
b) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZB
c) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZY
d) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZR
View Answer
65
Answer: d
Explanation: After transformation to delta, the impedance ZBY in delta connected system will be (Z_R (ZRZY+
ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZR .
6. If the resistors of star connected system are ZR, ZY, ZB then the impedance ZBR in delta connected system will
be?
a) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZY
b) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/R
c) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZB
d) (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/(ZB+ZR )
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: After transformation to delta, the impedance ZBR in delta connected system will be (Z_R (ZRZY+
ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZY.
7. A symmetrical three-phase, three-wire 440V supply is connected to star-connected load. The impedances in
each branch are ZR = (2+j3) Ω, ZY = (1-j2) Ω, ZB = (3+j4) Ω. Find ZRY.
a) (5.22-j0.82) Ω
b) (-3.02+j8) Ω
c) (3.8-j0.38) Ω
d) (-5.22+j0.82) Ω
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: ZRY = (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZB
= (3.8-j0.38) Ω.
8. Find ZBY in the question 7.
a) (-5.22+j0.82) Ω
b) (5.22-j0.82) Ω
c) (3.8-j0.38) Ω
d) (-3.02+j8) Ω
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: ZBY = (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZR
= (5.22-j0.82)Ω.
9. Find ZBR.
a) (5.22-j0.82) Ω
b) (-3.02+j8) Ω
c) (-5.22+j0.82) Ω
d) (3.8-j0.38) Ω
View Answer
66
Answer: b
Explanation: ZBR = (ZRZY+ ZYZB+ ZBZR)/ZY
= (-3.02+j8) Ω.
10. If a star connected system has equal impedances Z1, then after converting into delta connected system
having equal impedances Z2, then?
a) Z2 = Z1
b) Z2 = 2Z1
c) Z2 = 3Z1
d) Z2 = 4Z1
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If a star connected system has equal impedances Z1, then after converting into delta connected
system having equal impedances Z2, then Z2 = 3Z1.
“Voltage, Current and Power in a Star Connected System”.
1. In star connected system, VRY is equal to?

a) VYR
b) -VYR
c) 2VYR
d) 3VYR
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The voltage available between any pair of terminals is called the line voltage. The double script
notation is purposefully used to represent voltages and currents in poly phase circuits. In star connected
system, VRY = – VYR.
2. In three phase system, the line voltage VRY is equal to?
a) phasor sum of VRN and VNY
b) phasor difference of VRN and VNY
c) phasor sum of VRN and VNY
d) algebraic sum of VRN and VNY
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In three phase system, the line voltage VRY is equal to the phasor sum of VRN and VNY which is also
equal to the phasor difference of VRN and VYN.
3. The relation between the lengths of the phasors VRN and – VYN is?
a) |VRN| > – |VYN|
b) |VRN| < – |VYN|
c) |VRN| = – |VYN|
67
d) |VRN| >= – |VYN|
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The voltage VRY is found by compounding VRN and VYN reversed. The relation between the lengths
of the phasors VRN and – VYN is |VRN |= – |VYN |.
4. In a star connected system, the phasors VRN , VYN are ____ apart.
a) 15⁰
b) 30⁰
c) 45⁰
d) 60⁰
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In a star connected system, the phasors VRN , VYN are separated by θ= 60⁰. To subtract VYN from
VRN, we reverse the phase VYN and find its phasor sum with VRN.
5. The relation between VRY ,Vph in a star connected system is?
a) VRY =Vph
b) VRY =√3Vph
c) VRY =3√3Vph
d) VRY =3Vph
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The two phasors VYN and VBN are equal in length and are 60⁰apart. The relation between
VRY ,Vph in a star connected system is VRY = √3Vph.
6. In a star connected system, the relation between VYB ,Vph is?
a) VYB =Vph
b) VYB =3√3Vph
c) VYB =3Vph
d) VYB =√3Vph
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In a star connected system, the relation between VYB ,Vph is
VYB = √3Vph. The line voltage VYB is equal to the phasor difference of VYN and VBN and is equal to √3Vph.
7. The voltages, VBR ,Vph are related in star connected system is?
a) VBR =3Vph
b) VBR =3√3Vph
c) VBR =√3Vph
68
d) VBR =Vph
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The voltages, VBR ,Vph in star connected system are related as
VBR =√3Vph. The line voltage VYB is equal to the phasor difference of VBN and VRN and is equal to √3Vph.
8. A symmetrical star connected system has VRN =230∠0⁰. The phase sequence is RYB. Find VRY.
a) 398.37∠30⁰
b) 398.37∠-30⁰
c) 398.37∠90⁰
d) 398.37∠-90⁰
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Since the system is a balanced system, all the phase voltages are equal in magnitude but displaced
by 120⁰. VRN = 230∠0⁰V. VRY = √3×230∠(0o+30o)V=398.37∠30oV.
9. Find VYB in the figure shown in question 8.
a) 398.37∠-30⁰
b) 398.37∠210⁰
c) 398.37∠90⁰
d) 398.37∠-90⁰
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Corresponding line voltages are equal to √3 times the phase voltages and are 30⁰ ahead of the
respective phase voltages. VYN = 230∠-120⁰V. VYB = √3×230∠(-120o+30o)V=398.37∠-90⁰V.
10. Find VBR in the figure shown in question 8.
a) 398.37∠210⁰
b) 398.37∠-210⁰
c) 398.37∠120⁰
d) 398.37∠-120⁰
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: All the line voltages are equal in magnitude and are displaced by 120⁰. VBN = 230∠-240⁰V. VBR =
√3×230∠(-240o+30o)V=398.37∠-210oV.
“Voltage, Current and Power in a Delta Connected System”.
1. In a delta connected system, the voltage across the terminals R and Y is 400∠0⁰. Calculate the line voltage
VRY. Assume RYB phase sequence.
69
a) 400∠0⁰
b) 400∠120⁰
c) 400∠-120⁰
d) 400∠240⁰
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In a balanced delta-connected system we know |VRY |= |VPh|, and it is displaced by 120⁰, therefore
the line voltage VRY is VRY = 400∠0⁰V.
2. In the question 1 find the line voltage VYB.
a) 400∠120⁰
b) 400∠-120⁰
c) 400∠240⁰
d) 400∠-240⁰
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As |VYB |= |VPh|, and is displaced by 120⁰, therefore the line voltage VYB is VYB = 400∠-120⁰V. A
balanced three phase, three wire, delta connected system is referred to as mesh connection because it forms a
closed circuit.
3. In the question 1 find the line voltage VBR.
a) 400∠240⁰
b) 400∠120⁰
c) 400∠-240⁰
d) 400∠-120⁰
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: We know, |VBR|= |VPh |, and is displaced by 120⁰, therefore the line voltage VBR is VBR = 400∠-
240⁰V. Delta connection is so called because the three branches in the circuit can be arranged in the shape of
delta.
4. In delta-connected system, the currents IR , IY , IB are equal in magnitude and they are displaced by _____
from one another.
a) 0⁰
b) 60⁰
c) 90⁰
d) 120⁰
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In delta-connected system, the currents IR , IY , IB are equal in magnitude and they are displaced by
70
120⁰ from one another. From the manner of interconnection of the three phases in the circuit, it may appear
that the three phase are short circuited among themselves.
5. In a delta-connected system, the currents IR = IB = IY =?
a) IPh
b) 2IPh
c) 3IPh
d) 4IPh
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In a delta-connected system, the currents IR = IB = IY = IPh. Since the system is balanced, the sum
of the three voltages round the closed mesh is zero; consequently no current can flow around the mesh when
the terminals are open.
6. The relation between IL and IPh is in a delta connected system is?
a) IL = IPh
b) IL =√3 IPh
c) IL =3 IPh
d) IL = 3√3IPh
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The relation between IL and IPh is in a delta connected system is IL =√3 IPh. The arrows placed
alongside the voltages of the three phases indicate that the terminals are positive during their positive half
cycles.
7. The line currents are ___ behind respective phase currents in a delta connected system is?
a) 120⁰
b) 90⁰
c) 60⁰
d) 30⁰
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In a delta connected system, all the line currents are equal in magnitude but displaced by 120⁰
from one another and the line currents are 30⁰ behind the respective phase currents.
8. In a delta connected system, the expression of power (P) is?
a) VLILcosφ W
b) √3 VLILcosφ W
c) 3VLILcosφ W
d) 3√3VLILcosφ W
View Answer
71
Answer: b
Explanation: The total power in the delta circuit is the sum of the powers in the three phases. In a delta
connected system, the expression of power (P) is P = √3VLILcosφ W.
9. A balanced delta-connected load of (2+j3) Ω per phase is connected to a balanced three-phase 440V supply.
The phase current is 10A. Find the total active power.
a) 7.26W
b) 726W
c) 7260W
d) 72.6W
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: ZPh = √(22+32 )=3.6∠56.3⁰Ω. cosφ = RPh /ZPh = 2/3.6 = 0.55. IL = √3× IPh = 17.32A. Active power =
√3 VLILcosφ = √3×440×17.32×0.55= 7259.78W.
10. Find the apparent power in the information provided in the question 9.
a) 10955.67 VAR
b) 10.95567 VAR
c) 109.5567 VAR
d) 1.095567 VAR
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Sinφ = 0.83. Reactive power = √3 VLILsinφ. VL = 440V, IL = 17.32A. On substituting we get
reactive power = √3 x 440 x 17.32 = 10955.67 VAR.
“Three-Phase Balanced Circuits”.
1. In a balanced three-phase system-delta load, if we assume the line voltage is VRY = V∠0⁰ as a reference
phasor. Then the source voltage VYB is?
a) V∠0⁰
b) V∠-120⁰
c) V∠120⁰
d) V∠240⁰
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ is taken as a reference phasor. Then the source voltage VYB is V∠-
120⁰.
2. In the question 1, the source voltage VBR is?
a) V∠120⁰
b) V∠240⁰
72
c) V∠-240⁰
d) V∠-120⁰
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: As the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ is taken as a reference phasor. Then the source voltage VBR is V∠-
240⁰.
3. In a delta-connected load, the relation between line voltage and the phase voltage is?
a) line voltage > phase voltage
b) line voltage < phase voltage
c) line voltage = phase voltage
d) line voltage >= phase voltage
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: In a delta-connected load, the relation between line voltage and the phase voltage is line voltage =
phase voltage.
4. If the load impedance is Z∠Ø, the current (IR ) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-Ø
b) (V/Z)∠Ø
c) (V/Z)∠90-Ø
d) (V/Z)∠-90+Ø
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As the load impedance is Z∠Ø, the current flows in the three load impedances and the current
flowing in the R impedance is IR = VBR∠0⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-Ø.
5. In the question 4, the expression obtained for current (IY) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-120+Ø
b) (V/Z)∠120-Ø
c) (V/Z)∠120+Ø
d) (V/Z)∠-120-Ø
View Answer
Answer: d
flowing in the Y impedance is IY = VYB∠120⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-120-Ø.
6. In the question 4, the expression obtained for current (IB) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-240+Ø
b) (V/Z)∠-240-Ø
c) (V/Z)∠240-Ø
73
d) (V/Z)∠240+Ø
View Answer
Answer: b
flowing in the B impedance is IB = VBR∠240⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-240-Ø.
7. A three phase, balanced delta connected load of (4+j8) Ω is connected across a 400V, 3 – Ø balanced
supply. Determine the phase current IR . Assume the phase sequence to be RYB.
a) 44.74∠-63.4⁰A
b) 44.74∠63.4⁰A
c) 45.74∠-63.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠63.4⁰A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Taking the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ as a reference VRY = 400∠0⁰V, VYB = 400∠-120⁰V and VBR =
400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8) Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IR = (400∠0o)/(8.94∠63.4o )=
44.74∠-63.4⁰A.
8. In the question 7, determine the phase current IY.
a) 44.74∠183.4⁰A
b) 45.74∠183.4⁰A
c) 44.74∠183.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠-183.4⁰A
View Answer
Answer: c
400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8)Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IY = (400∠120o)/(8.94∠63.4o )=
44.74∠-183.4⁰A.
9. In the question 7, determine the phase current IB.
a) 44.74∠303.4⁰A
b) 44.74∠-303.4⁰A
c) 45.74∠303.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠-303.4⁰A
View Answer
Answer: b
400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8) Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IB = (400∠240o)/(8.94∠63.4o)=
44.74∠-303.4⁰A.
10. Determine the power (kW) drawn by the load.
a) 21
74
b) 22
c) 23
d) 24
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Power is defined as the product of voltage and current. So the power drawn by the load is P =
3VPhIPhcosØ = 24kW.
“Three-Phase Unbalanced Circuits”.
1. If the system is a three-wire system, the currents flowing towards the load in the three lines must add to ___
at any given instant.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) zero
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: If the system is a three-wire system, the currents flowing towards the load in the three lines must
add to zero at any given instant.
2. The three impedances Z1 = 20∠30⁰Ω, Z2 = 40∠60⁰Ω, Z3 = 10∠-90⁰Ω are delta-connected to a 400V, 3 – Ø
system. Determine the phase current IR.
a) (17.32-j10) A
b) (-17.32-j10) A
c) (17.32+j10) A
d) (-17.32+j10) A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Taking VRY = V∠0⁰ as a reference phasor, and assuming RYB phase sequence, we have VRY =
400∠0⁰V Z1 = 20∠30⁰Ω = (17.32+j10)Ω IR = (400∠0o)/(20∠30o)=(17.32-j10) A.
3. Find the phase current IY from the question 2.
a) (10-j0) A
b) (10+j0) A
c) (-10+j0) A
d) (-10-j0) A
View Answer
75
Answer: c
Explanation: The voltage VYB is VYB = 400∠-120⁰V. The impedance Z2 is Z2 = 40∠60⁰Ω => IY =(400∠-
120o)/(40∠60o)=(-10+j0)A.
4. Find the phase current IB from the question 2.
a) (34.64-j20) A
b) (34.64+j20) A
c) (-34.64+j20) A
d) (-34.64-j20) A
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The voltage VBR is VBR = 400∠-240⁰V. The impedance Z3 is Z3 = 10∠-90⁰Ω =>
IB =(400∠240o)/(10∠-90o )=(-34.64-j20)A.
5. From the question 2, find the line current I1.
a) (-51.96-j10) A
b) (-51.96+j10) A
c) (51.96+j10) A
d) (51.96+j10) A
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The line current I1 is the difference of IR and IB. So the line current I1 is I1 = IR– IB = (51.96+j10) A.
a) (-27.32+j10) A
b) (27.32+j10) A
c) (-27.32-j10) A
d) (27.32-j10) A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The line current I2 is the difference of IY and IR. So the line current I2 is I2 = IY– IR = (-27.32+j10)
A.
a) (24.646+j20) A
b) (-24.646+j20) A
c) (-24.646-j20) A
d) (24.646-j20) A
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The line current I3 is the difference of IB and IY. So the line current I3 is I3 = IB– IY = (-24.646-j20)
A.
76
8. In the question 2 find the power in the R phase.
a) 6628
b) 6728
c) 6828
d) 6928
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The term power is defined as the product of square of current and the impedance. So the power in
the R phase = 202 x 17.32 = 6928W.
9. In the question 2 find the power in the Y phase.
a) 1000
b) 2000
c) 3000
d) 4000
View Answer
Answer: b
the Y phase = 102 x 20 = 2000W.
10. In the question 2 find the power in the B phase.
a) 0
b) 1
c) 3
d) 2
View Answer
Answer: a
the B phase = 402 x 0 = 0W.
“Power Measurement in Three-Phase Circuits”.
1. The wattmeter method is used to measure power in a three-phase load. The wattmeter readings are 400W
and -35W. Calculate the total active power.
a) 360
b) 365
c) 370
d) 375
View Answer
77
Answer: b
Explanation: Wattmeters are generally used to measure power in the circuits. Total active power = W1 + W2 =
400 + (-35) =365W.
2. In the question 2 find the power factor.
a) 0.43
b) 0.53
c) 0.63
d) 0.73
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: We know tanØ = √3((WR – WY)/(WR + WY)) => tanØ = √3 (400-(-35))/(400+(-35) )=2.064 => Ø
= 64.15⁰. Power factor = 0.43.
3. Find the reactive power in the question 2.
a) 751.44
b) 752.44
c) 753.44
d) 754.44
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Reactive power = √3VLILsinØ. We know that WR – WY = 400-(-35)) = 435 = VLILsinØ. Reactive
power = √3 x 435 = 753.44 VAR.
4. The input power to a three-phase load is 10kW at 0.8 Pf. Two watt meters are connected to measure the
power. Find the reading of higher reading wattmeter.
a) 7.165
b) 6.165
c) 6.165
d) 4.165
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: WR + WY = 10kW. Ø = cos-10.8=36.8o => tanØ = 0.75 = √3 (WR-WY)/(WR+WY)=(WR-WY)/10. WR-
WY=4.33kW. WR+WY=10kW. WR=7.165kW.
5. Find the reading of higher reading wattmeter in the question 2.
a) 1.835
b) 2.835
c) 3.835
d) 4.835
View Answer
78
Answer: b
Explanation: WR + WY = 10kW. Ø = cos-10.8=36.8o => tanØ = 0.75 = √3 (WR-WY)/(WR+WY)=(WR-WY)/10. WR-
WY=4.33kW. WR+WY=10kW. WY=2.835kW.
6. The readings of the two watt meters used to measure power in a capacitive load are -3000W and 8000W
respectively. Calculate the input power. Assume RYB sequence.
a) 5
b) 50
c) 500
d) 5000
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Toatal power is the sum of the power in R and power in Y. So total power = WR+WY = -
3000+8000 = 5000W
7. Find the power factor in the question 6.
a) 0.25
b) 0.5
c) 0.75
d) 1
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As the load is capacitive, the wattmeter connected in the leading phase gives less value. WR=-
3000. WY=8000. tanØ = √3 (8000-(-3000))/5000=3.81 => Ø = 75.29⁰ => cosØ = 0.25.
8. The wattmeter reading while measuring the reactive power with wattmeter is?
a) VLILsecØ
b) VLILsinØ
c) VLILtanØ
d) VLILcosØ
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The wattmeter reading while measuring the reactive power with wattmeter is wattmeter reading =
VLILsinØ VAR.
9. The total reactive power in the load while measuring the reactive power with wattmeter is?
a) √3VLILcosØ
b) √3VLILtanØ
c) √3VLILsinØ
d)√3 VLILsecØ
View Answer
79
Answer: c
Explanation: To obtain the reactive power, wattmeter reading is to be multiplied by √3. Total reactive power =
√3VLILsinØ.
10. A single wattmeter is connected to measure reactive power of a three-phase, three-wire balanced load. The
line current is 17A and line voltage is 440V. Calculate the power factor of the load if the reading of the
wattmeter is 4488 VAR.
a) 0.6
b) 0.8
c) 1
d) 1.2
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Wattmeter reading = VLILsinØ => 4488 = 440 x 17sinØ => sinØ = 0.6. Power factor = cosØ =
0.8.
UNIT-III
TRANSIENT ANALYSIS
“DC Response of an R-L Circuit”.
1. The expression of current in R- L circuit is?

a) i=(V/R)(1+exp⁡((R/L)t))
b) i=-(V/R)(1-exp⁡((R/L)t))
c) i=-(V/R)(1+exp⁡((R/L)t))
d) i=(V/R)(1-exp⁡((R/L)t))
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The expression of current in R- L circuit is i = (V/R)-(V/R)exp⁡((R/L)t). On solving we get i =
(V/R)(1-exp⁡((R/L)t) ).
2. The steady state part in the expression of current in the R-L circuit is?
a) (V/R)(exp⁡((R/L)t))
b) (V/R)(-exp⁡((R/L)t))
c) V/R
d) R/V
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The steady state part in the expression of current in the R-L circuit is steady state part = V/R.
When the switch S is closed, the response reaches a steady state value after a time interval.
80
3. In the expression of current in the R-L circuit the transient part is?
a) R/V
b) (V/R)(-exp⁡((R/L)t))
c) (V/R)(exp⁡((R/L)t))
d) V/R
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The expression of current in the R-L circuit has the transient part as
(V/R)(-exp⁡((R/L)t) ). The transition period is defined as the time taken for the current to reach its final or
steady state value from its initial value.
4. The value of the time constant in the R-L circuit is?
a) L/R
b) R/L
c) R
d) L
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The time constant of a function (V/R)e-(R/L)t is the time at which the exponent of e is unity where e
is the base of the natural logarithms. The term L / R is called the time constant and is denoted by ‘τ’.
5. After how many time constants, the transient part reaches more than 99 percent of its final value?
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: After five time constants, the transient part of the response reaches more than 99 percent of its
final value.
6. A series R-L circuit with R = 30Ω and L = 15H has a constant voltage V = 60V applied at t = 0 as shown in
the figure. Determine the current (A) in the circuit at t = 0+.
a) 1
81
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Since the inductor never allows sudden changes in currents. At t = 0+ that just after the initial
state the current in the circuit is zero.
7. The expression of current obtained from the circuit in terms of differentiation from the circuit shown in the
question 6?
a) di/dt+i=4
b) di/dt+2i=0
c) di/dt+2i=4
d) di/dt-2i=4
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Let the i be the current flowing through the circuit. By applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law, we get
15 di/dt+30i=60 => di/dt+2i=4.
8. The expression of current from the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) i=2(1-e-2t)A
b) i=2(1+e-2t)A
c) i=2(1+e2t)A
d) i=2(1+e2t)A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0+ the current in the circuit is zero. Therefore at t = 0+, i = 0 => 0 = c + 2 =>c = -2.
Substituting the value of ‘c’ in the current equation, we have i = 2(1-e-2t)A.
9. The expression of voltage across resistor in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) VR =60(1+e2t)V
b) VR =60(1-e-2t)V
c) VR =60(1-e2t)V
d) VR =60(1+e-2t)V
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Voltage across the resistor VR = iR. On substituting the expression of current we get voltage
across resistor = (2(1-e-2t) )×30=60(1-e-2t)V.
10. Determine the voltage across the inductor in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) VL =60(-e-2t)V
82
b) VL =60(e2t)V
c) VL =60(e-2t)V
d) VL =60(-e2t)V
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Voltage across the inductor VL = Ldi/dt. On substituting the expression of current we get voltage
across the inductor = 15×(d/dt)(2(1-e-2t)))=60(e-2t)V.
“DC Response of an R-C Circuit”.
1. The current in the R-L circuit at a time t = 0+ is?

a) V/R
b) R/V
c) V
d) R
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The capacitor never allows sudden changes in voltage, it will act as a short circuit at t = 0+. So
the current in the circuit at t = 0+ is V/R.
2. The expression of current in R- C circuit is?
a) i=(V/R)exp⁡(t/RC )
b) i=(V/R)exp⁡(-t/RC )
c) i=(V/R)-exp(⁡t/RC )
d) i=(V/R)-exp⁡(-t/RC )
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The particular solution of the current equation is zero. So the expression of current in R- C circuit
is i=(V/R)exp⁡(-t/RC ).
3. In an R-C circuit, when the switch is closed, the response ____________
a) do not vary with time
b) decays with time
c) rises with time
d) first increases and then decreases
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In a R-C circuit, when the switch is closed, the response decays with time that is the response
V/R decreases with increase in time.
83
4. The time constant of an R-C circuit is?
a) RC
b) R/C
c) R
d) C
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The time constant of an R-C circuit is RC and it is denoted by τ and the value of τ in dc response
of R-C circuit is RC sec.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: After five time constants, the transient part of the response reaches more than 99 percent of its
final value.
6.A series R-C circuit consists of resistor of 10 and capacitor of 0.1F as shown in the figure. A constant
voltage of 20V is applied to the circuit at t = 0. What is the current in the circuit at t = 0?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: At t = 0, switch S is closed. Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltage, the
current in the circuit is i = V/R = 20/10 = 2A. At t = 0, i = 2A.
7. The expression of current obtained from the circuit in terms of differentiation from the circuit shown in the
question 6?
a) di/dt+i=1
b) di/dt+i=2
c) di/dt+i=3
d) di/dt+i=0
View Answer
84
Answer: d
Explanation: By applying Kirchhoff’s law, we get
Differentiating with respect to t, we get 10 di/dt+i/0.1=0 => di/dt+i=0.

8. The current equation in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) i=2(e-2t)A
b) i=2(e2t)A
c) i=2(-e-2t)A
d) i=2(-e2t)A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0, switch S is closed. Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltage, the
current in the circuit is i = V/R = 20/10 = 2A. At t = 0, i = 2A. The current equation is i=2(e-2t)A.
a) VR =20(et)V
b) VR =20(-e-t)V
c) VR =20(-et)V
d) VR =20(e-t)V
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The expression of voltage across resistor in the circuit is VR = iR =(2(e-t ) )×10=20(e-t )V.
10. Determine the voltage across the capacitor in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) VC =60(1-e-t )V
b) VC =60(1+et )V
c) VC =60(1-et )V
d) VC =60(1+e-t )V
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The expression of voltage across capacitor in the circuit VC = V(1-e-t/RC) =20(1-e-t)V.
“DC Response of an R-L-C Circuit”.
1. For an R-L-C circuit, we get [D – (K1 + K2)][D – (K1 – K2)] i = 0. If K2 is positive, then the curve will be?
a) damped
b) over damped
c) under damped
85
d) critically damped
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: For an R-L-C circuit, we get [D – (K1 + K2)][D – (K1 – K2)] i = 0. If K2 is positive, then the curve
will be over damped response.
2. If the roots of an equation are real and unequal, then the response will be?
a) critically damped
b) under damped
c) over damped
d) damped
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If the roots of an equation are real and unequal, then the response will be over damped response.
Over damped response of a system is defined as the system returns (exponentially decays) to equilibrium
without oscillating.
3. If the roots of an equation are complex conjugate, then the response will be?
a) over damped
b) critically damped
c) damped
d) under damped
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: If the roots of an equation are complex conjugate, then the response will be under damped
response. Damping is an influence within or upon an oscillatory system that has the effect of reducing,
restricting or preventing its oscillations.
4. If the roots of an equation are real and equal, then the response will be?
a) over damped
b) damped
c) critically damped
d) under damped
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If the roots of an equation are real and equal, then the response will be critically damped
response. For a critically damped system, the system returns to equilibrium as quickly as possible without
oscillating.
5. The circuit shown in the figure consists of resistance, capacitance and inductance in series with a 100V
source when the switch is closed at t = 0. Find the equation obtained from the circuit in terms of current.
86
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0, switch S is closed when the 100V source is applied to the circuit and results in the
following differential equation.
6. Replacing the differentiation with D1, D2 in the equation obtained from the question 5. Find the values of D1,
D2.
a) 200±j979.8
b) -200±j979.8
c) 100±j979.8
d) -100±j979.8
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Let the roots of the characteristic equation are denoted by D1, D2. So on differentiating the
equation obtained in the question 5, we get D1 = -200+j979.8, D2 = -200-j979.8.
7. The expression of current from the circuit shown in the question 5.
a) i=e-200t [c1 cos979.8t+c2 979.8t]A
b) i=e200t [c1 cos979.8t-c2 979.8t]A
c) i=e-200t [c1 cos979.8t-c2 979.8t]A
d) i=e200t [c1 cos979.8t+c2 979.8t]A
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The expression of current from the circuit will be i = eK t[c1cosK1t + c2sinK2t]. So, i=e-
1
200t
[c1 cos979.8t+c2 979.8t]A.
8. At time t = 0, the value of current in the circuit shown in the question 5.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: At t = 0 that is initially the current flowing through the circuit is zero that is i = 0. So, i = 0.
87
9. The voltage across the inductor at t = 0 in the circuit shown in the question 5.
a) 50
b) 100
c) 150
d) 200
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: At t = 0, that is initially the voltage across the inductor is 100V. => V = 100V. So we can write
Ldi/dt = 100.
10. The current equation obtained from the circuit shown in the question 5.
a) i=e-200t (1.04 sin979.8t)A
b) i=e-200t (2.04 sin979.8t)A
c) i=e-200t (3.04 sin979.8t)A
d) i=e-200t (4.04 sin979.8t)A
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: On solving the values of c1, c2 are obtained as c1 = 0, c2 = 2.04. So, the current equation is i=e-
200t
(2.04 sin979.8t)A.
“Sinusoidal Response of an R-L Circuit”.
1. In the sinusoidal response of R-L circuit, the complementary function of the solution of i is?
a) ic = ce-t(R/L)
b) ic = cet(RL)
c) ic = ce-t(RL)
d) ic = cet(R/L)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: From the R-L circuit, we get the characteristic equation as (D+R/L)i=V/L cos⁡(ωt+θ). The
complementary function of the solution i is ic = ce-t(R/L).
2. The particular current obtained from the solution of i in the sinusoidal response of R-L circuit is?
a) ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(ωL/R))
b) ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(ωL/R))
c) ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt-θ+tan-1(ωL/R))
88
d) ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt-θ+tan-1(ωL/R))
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The characteristic equation consists of two parts, viz. complementary function and particular
integral. The particular integral is ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(ωL/R)).
3. The value of ‘c’ in complementary function of ‘i’ is?
a) c = -V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(ωL/R))
b) c = -V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1(ωL/R))
c) c = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(ωL/R))
d) c = V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1(ωL/R))
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Since the inductor does not allow sudden changes in currents, at t = 0, i = 0. So, c = -
V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1(ωL/R)).
4. The complete solution of the current in the sinusoidal response of R-L circuit is?
a) i = e-t(R/L)[V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))]+V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))
b) i = e-t(R/L)[-V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1)(ωL/R))]-V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))
c) i = e-t(R/L)[V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))]-V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))
d) i = e-t(R/L)[-V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))]+V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R))
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The complete solution for the current becomes i = e-t(R/L)[-V/√(R2+(ωL)2) cos⁡(θ-tan-
1
)⁡(ωL/R))]+V/√(R2+(ωL)2)cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡(ωL/R)).
5. In the circuit shown below, the switch is closed at t = 0, applied voltage is v (t) = 100cos (103t+π/2),
resistance R = 20Ω and inductance L = 0.1H. The complementary function of the solution of ‘i’ is?
a) ic = ce-100t
b) ic = ce100t
c) ic = ce-200t
d) ic = ce200t
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: By applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to the circuit, we have 20i+0.1di/dt=100cos⁡(103 t+π/2) =>
(D+200)i=1000cos⁡(1000t+π/2). The complementary function is ic = ce-200t.
6. The particular integral of the solution of ‘i’ from the information provided in the question 5.
a) ip = 0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
b) ip = 0.98cos⁡(1000t-π/2-78.6o)
89
c) ip = 0.98cos⁡(1000t-π/2+78.6o)
d) ip = 0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2+78.6o)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Assuming particular integral as ip = A cos (ωt + θ) + B sin(ωt + θ). We get ip = V/√(R2+(ωL)2 )
cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(ωL/R)) where ω = 1000 rad/sec, V = 100V, θ = π/2, L = 0.1H, R = 20Ω. On substituting, we
get ip = 0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o).
7. The complete solution of ‘i’ from the information provided in the question 5.
a) i = ce-200t + 0.98cos⁡(1000t-π/2-78.6o)
b) i = ce-200t + 0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
c) i = ce-200t + 0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2+78.6o)
d) i = ce-200t + 0.98cos⁡(1000t-π/2+78.6o)
View Answer
8. The current flowing through the circuit at t = 0 in the circuit shown in the question 5 is?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: At t = 0 that is initially the current flowing through the circuit is zero that is i = 0. So, i = 0.
9. The value of c in the complementary function of ‘i’ in the question 5 is?
a) c = -0.98cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)
b) c = -0.98cos⁡(π/2+78.6o)
c) c = 0.98cos⁡(π/2+78.6o)
d) c = 0.98cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0, the current flowing through the circuit is zero. Placing i = 0 in the current equation we
get c = -0.98cos⁡(π/2-78.6o).
10. The complete solution of ‘i’ in the question 5 is?
a) i = [-0.98 cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)] exp⁡(-200t)+0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
b) i = [-0.98 cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)] exp⁡(-200t)-0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
c) i = [0.98 cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)] exp⁡(-200t)-0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
d) i = [0.98 cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)] exp⁡(-200t)+0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o)
View Answer
90
Answer: a
Explanation: The complete solution for the current is the sum of the complementary function and the particular
integral.
So, i = [-0.98 cos⁡(π/2-78.6o)] exp⁡(-200t)+0.98cos⁡(1000t+π/2-78.6o).
“Sinusoidal Response of an R-C Circuit”.
1. In the sinusoidal response of R-C circuit, the complementary function of the solution of i is?
a) ic = ce-t/RC
b) ic = cet/RC
c) ic = ce-t/RC
d) ic = cet/RC
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: From the R-c circuit, we get the characteristic equation as (D+1/RC)i=-Vω/R sin⁡(ωt+θ). The
complementary function of the solution i is ic = ce-t/RC.
2. The particular current obtained from the solution of i in the sinusoidal response of R-C circuit is?
a) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))
b) ip= -V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(1/ωRC))
c) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(1/ωRC))
d) ip = -V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))
View Answer
Answer: a
integral. The particular integral is ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)).
3. The value of ‘c’ in complementary function of ‘i’ is?
a) c = V/R cosθ+V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2 ) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))
b) c = V/R cosθ+V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2 ) cos⁡(θ-tan-1(1/ωRC))
c) c = V/R cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2 ) cos⁡(θ-tan-1(1/ωRC))
d) c = V/R cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2 ) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltages, at t = 0, i =V/R cosθ. So, c = V/R
cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2 ) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)).
4. The complete solution of the current in the sinusoidal response of R-C circuit is?
a) i = e-t/RC[V/R cosθ+V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))+V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)].
b) i = e-t/RC[V/R cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))-V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)].
c) i = e-t/RC[V/R cosθ+V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))-V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)].
91
d) i = e-t/RC[V/R cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2) cos⁡(θ+tan-1(1/ωRC))+V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)].
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The complete solution for the current becomes i = e-t/RC[V/R cosθ-V/√(R2+(1/(ωC))2) cos⁡(θ+tan-
1
(1/ωRC))+V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1(1/ωRC)).
5. In the circuit shown below, the switch is closed at t = 0, applied voltage is v (t) = 50cos (102t+π/4),
resistance R = 10Ω and capacitance C = 1µF. The complementary function of the solution of ‘i’ is?
a) ic = c exp (-t/10-10)
b) ic = c exp(-t/1010)
c) ic = c exp (-t/10-5)
d) ic = c exp (-t/105)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: By applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to the circuit, we have
(D+1/10-5) )i=-500sin⁡(1000t+π/4). The complementary function is ic = c exp (-t/10-5).

6. The particular integral of the solution of ‘i’ from the information provided in the question 5.
a) ip = (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/4-89.94o)
b) ip = (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t-π/4-89.94o)
c) ip = (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t-π/4+89.94o)
d) ip = (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/4+89.94o)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Assuming particular integral as ip = A cos (ωt + θ) + B sin (ωt + θ)
we get ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1(1/ωRC))
where ω = 1000 rad/sec, θ = π/4, C = 1µF, R = 10Ω. On substituting, we get ip = (4.99×10-3)
cos⁡(100t+π/4+89.94o).
7. The current flowing in the circuit at t = 0 in the question 5 is?
a) 1.53
b) 2.53
c) 3.53
92
d) 4.53
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: At t = 0 that is initially current flowing through the circuit is i = V/R cosθ = (50/10)cos(π/4) =
3.53A.
8. The complete solution of ‘i’ from the information provided in the question 5.
a) i = c exp (-t/10-5) – (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
b) i = c exp (-t/10-5) + (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
c) i = -c exp(-t/10-5) + (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
d) i = -c exp(-t/10-5) – (4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
View Answer
Answer: b
integral. The complete solution for the current becomes i = c exp (-t/10-5) + (4.99×10-3)
cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o ).
9. The value of c in the complementary function of ‘i’ in the question 5 is?
a) c = (3.53-4.99×10-3) cos⁡(π/4+89.94o )
b) c = (3.53+4.99×10-3) cos⁡(π/4+89.94o )
c) c = (3.53+4.99×10-3) cos⁡(π/4-89.94o )
d) c = (3.53-4.99×10-3) cos⁡(π/4-89.94o)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0, the current flowing through the circuit is 3.53A. So, c = (3.53-4.99×10-3)
cos⁡(π/4+89.94o ).
10. The complete solution of ‘i’ in the question 5 is?
a) i = [(3.53-4.99×10-3)cos⁡(π/4+89.94o)] exp⁡(-t/0.00001)+4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
b) i = [(3.53+4.99×10-3)cos⁡(π/4+89.94o)] exp⁡(-t/0.00001)+4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
c) i = [(3.53+4.99×10-3)cos⁡(π/4+89.94o)] exp⁡(-t/0.00001)-4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
d) i = [(3.53-4.99×10-3)cos⁡(π/4+89.94o)] exp⁡(-t/0.00001)-4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o )
View Answer
Answer: a
integral. So, i = [(3.53-4.99×10-3)cos⁡(π/4+89.94o)] exp⁡(-t/0.00001)+4.99×10-3) cos⁡(100t+π/2+89.94o).
“Sinusoidal Response of an R-L-C Circuit”.
1. The particular current obtained from the solution of i in the sinusoidal response of R-L-C circuit is?
a) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC+ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC+ωL)/R))
93
b) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))
c) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC+ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))
d) ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC+ωL)/R))
View Answer
Answer: b
integral. The particular integral is ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R)).
2. . In the sinusoidal response of R-L-C circuit, the complementary function of the solution of i is?
a) ic = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t
1 2 1 2
b) ic = c1 e(K -K )t + c1 e(K -K )t
1 2 1 2
c) ic = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t
1 2 2 1
d) ic = c1 e(K +K )t +c1e(K +K )t
1 2 1 2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: From the R-L circuit, we get the characteristic equation as
(D2+R/L D+1/LC)=0. The complementary function of the solution i is ic = c1 e(K +K )t + c1e(K -K )t. 1 2 1 2
3. The complete solution of the current in the sinusoidal response of R-L-C circuit is?
a) i = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t – V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))
1 2 1 2
b) i = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t – V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))

1 2 1 2
c) i = c1 e (K
1 +K2)t + c1 e
(K
1 -K2)t + V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))
d) i = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t + V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ-tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R))
1 2 1 2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The complete solution for the current becomes i = c1 e(K +K )t + c1 e(K -K )t + V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 )
1 2 1 2
cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R)).
4. In the circuit shown below, the switch is closed at t = 0. Applied voltage is v (t) = 400cos (500t + π/4).
Resistance R = 15Ω, inductance L = 0.2H and capacitance = 3 µF. Find the roots of the characteristic equation.
a) -38.5±j1290
b) 38.5±j1290
c) 37.5±j1290
d) -37.5±j1290
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: By applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to the circuit,
94
On differentiating the above equation and on solving, we get roots of the characteristic equation as -
37.5±j1290.
5. Find the complementary current from the information provided in the question 4.
a) ic = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t)
b) ic = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t – c2sin1290t)
c) ic = e37.5t(c1cos1290t – c2sin1290t)
d) ic = e37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The roots of the charactesistic equation are D1 = -37.5+j1290 and D2 = -37.5-j1290. The
complementary current obtained is ic = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t).
6. The particular solution from the information provided in the question 4.
a) ip = 0.6cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰)
b) ip = 0.6cos(500t + π/4 + 89.5⁰)
c) ip = 0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 89.5⁰)
d) ip = 0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Particular solution is ip = V/√(R2+(1/ωC-ωL)2 ) cos⁡(ωt+θ+tan-1)⁡((1/ωC-ωL)/R)). ip =
0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰).
7. The complete solution of current from the information provided in the question 4.
a) i = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰)
b) i = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t – π/4 + 88.5⁰)
c) i = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t) – 0.7cos(500t – π/4 + 88.5⁰)
d) i = e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t) – 0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The complete solution is the sum of the complementary function and the particular integral. So i
= e-37.5t(c1cos1290t + c2sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t + π/4 + 88.5⁰).
8. The value of the c1 obtained in the complete solution of question 7.
a) -0.5
b) 0.5
c) 0.6
d) -0.6
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: At t = 0 that is initially the current flowing through the circuit is zero that is i = 0. So, c1 = -
0.71cos (133.5⁰) = 0.49.
95
9. The value of the c2 obtained in the complete solution of question 7.
a) 2.3
b) -2.3
c) 1.3
d) -1.3
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Differentiating the current equation, we have di/dt = e-37.5t (-1290c1sin1290t + 1290c2cos1290t) –
37.5e-37.5t(c1cos1290t+c2sin1290t) – 0.71x500sin(500t+45o+88.5o). At t = 0, di/dt = 1414. On solving, we get c2 =
1.31.
10. The complete solution of current obtained by substituting the values of c1 and c2 is?
a) i = e-37.5t(0.49cos1290t – 1.3sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t + 133.5⁰)
b) i = e-37.5t(0.49cos1290t – 1.3sin1290t) – 0.7cos(500t + 133.5⁰)
c) i = e-37.5t(0.49cos1290t + 1.3sin1290t) – 0.7cos(500t + 133.5⁰)
d) i = e-37.5t(0.49cos1290t + 1.3sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t + 133.5⁰)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The complete solution is the sum of the complementary function and the particular integral. So i
= e-37.5t(0.49cos1290t + 1.3sin1290t) + 0.7cos(500t + 133.5⁰).
UNIT-IV
NETWORK FUNCTIONS AND NETWORK PARAMETERS
“Poles and Zeros of Network Functions”.
1. The coefficients of the polynomials P (S) and Q (S) in the network function N (S) are ________ for passive
network.
a) real and positive
b) real and negative
c) complex and positive
d) complex and negative
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The coefficients of the polynomials P (S) and Q (S) in the network function N (S) are real and
positive for passive network. On factorising the network function we obtain the poles and zeros.
2. The scale factor is denoted by the letter?
a) G
b) H
96
c) I
d) J
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The scale factor is denoted by the letter ‘H’ and its value is equal to the ratio of ao to bo.
3. The zeros in the transfer function are denoted by?
a) 3
b) 2
c) 1
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The roots of the equation P (S) = 0 are zeros of the transfer function. The zeros in the transfer
function are denoted by ‘o’.
4. The poles in the transfer function are denoted by?
a) x
b) y
c) z
d) w
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The roots of the equation Q (S) = 0 are poles of the transfer function. The poles in the transfer
function are denoted by ‘x’.
5. The network function N (S) becomes _________ when s is equal to anyone of the zeros.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 0
d) ∞
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The network function N (S) becomes zero when s in the transfer function is equal to anyone of
the zeros as the network function is completely defined by its poles and zeros.
6. The N (S) becomes ________ when s is equal to any of the poles.
a) ∞
b) 0
c) 1
97
d) 2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The network function is completely defined by its poles and zeros and the network function N (S)
becomes infinite when s in the transfer function is equal to anyone of the poles.
7. If the poles or zeros are not repeated, then the function is said to be having __________ poles or ________
zeros.
a) simple, multiple
b) multiple, simple
c) simple, simple
d) multiple, multiple
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If the poles or zeros are not repeated, then the function is said to be having simple poles or simple
zeros and the network function is said to be stable when the real parts of the poles and zeros are negative.
8. If the poles or zeros are repeated, then the function is said to be having __________ poles or ________
zeros.
a) multiple, multiple
b) simple, simple
c) multiple, simple
d) simple, multiple
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: If there are repeated poles or zeros, then function is said to be having multiple poles or multiple
zeros and the network function is stable if the poles and zeros lie within the left half of the s-plane.
9. If the number of zeros (n) are greater than the number of poles (m), then there will be _________ number of
zeros at s = ∞.
a) n
b) m
c) n-m
d) n+m
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If the number of zeros (n) are greater than the number of poles (m), then there will be (n-m)
number of zeros at s = ∞ and to obtain (n-m) zeros at s = ∞ the condition is n>m.
10. If the number of poles (m)are greater than the number of zeros (n), then there will be _________ number of
zeros at s = ∞.
98
a) m+n
b) m-n
c) m
d) n
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: If the number of poles (m)are greater than the number of zeros (n), then there will be (m-n)
number of zeros at s = ∞ and to obtain (m-n) poles at s = ∞ the condition is m>n.
1. The driving point function is the ratios of polynomials in s. Polynomials are obtained from the __________
of the elements and their combinations.
a) transform voltage
b) transform current
c) transform impedance
d) transform admittance
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The driving point function is the ratio of polynomials in s. Polynomials are obtained from the
transform impedance of the elements and their combinations and if the zeros and poles are not repeated then
the poles or zeros are said to be distinct or simple.
2. The pole is that finite value of S for which N (S) becomes __________
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) ∞
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The quantities P1, P2 … Pm are called poles of N (S) if N (S) = ∞ at those points. The pole is that
finite value of S for which N (S) becomes infinity.
3. A function N (S) is said to have a pole (or zero) at infinity, if the function N (1/S) has a pole (or zero) at S =
?
a) ∞
b) 2
c) 0
d) 1
View Answer
99
Answer: c
Explanation: A function N (S) is said to have a pole (or zero) at infinity, if the function N (1/S) has a pole (or
zero) at S = infinity. A zero or pole is said to be of multiplicity ‘r’ if (S-Z)r or(S-P)r is a factor of P(s) or Q(s).
4. The number of zeros including zeros at infinity is __________ the number of poles including poles at
infinity.
a) greater than
b) equal to
c) less than
d) greater than or equal to
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The number of zeros including zeros at infinity is equal to the number of poles including poles at
infinity and it cannot be greater than or less than the number of poles including poles at infinity.
5. The poles of driving point impedance are those frequencies corresponding to ___________ conditions?
a) short circuit
b) voltage source
c) open circuit
d) current source
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: A zero of N(s) is a zero of V(s),it signifies a short circuit. Similarly a pole of Z(s) is a zero of I(s).
The poles of driving point impedance are those frequencies corresponding to open circuit conditions.
6. The zeros of driving point impedance are those frequencies corresponding to ___________ conditions?
a) current source
b) open circuit
c) voltage source
d) short circuit
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The zeros of driving point impedance are those frequencies corresponding to short circuit
conditions as pole of Z(s) is a zero of I(s) and zero of N(s) is a zero of V(s),it signifies a short circuit.
7. In the driving point admittance function, a zero of Y (s) means a _______of I (S).
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) zero
View Answer
100
Answer: d
Explanation: In the driving point admittance function, a zero of Y (s) means a zero of I (S) i.e., the open circuit
condition as the driving point admittance function is the ratio of I(s) to V(s).
8. In the driving point admittance function, a pole of Y (s) means a _______ of V (S).
a) zero
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The driving point admittance function Y(s) = I(s)/V(s). In the driving point admittance function, a
pole of Y (s) means a zero of V (S) i.e., the short circuit condition.
9. The real part of all zeros and poles must be?
a) positive or zero
b) negative or zero
c) positive
d) negative
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The real part of all zeros and poles must be negative or zero. But the poles or zeros should not be
positive because if they are positive, then they will lie in the right-half of the s-plane.
10. Poles or zeros lying on the jω axis must be?
a) complex
b) at least one complex pole
c) at least one complex zero
d) simple
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Poles or zeros lying on the jω axis must be simple because on jω axis the imaginary part of poles
or zeros will be zero.
“Properties of Transfer Functions”.
1. The coefficients of numerator polynomial and the denominator polynomial in a transfer function must be?
a) real
b) complex
c) at least one real coefficient
101
d) at least one complex coefficient
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The coefficients of P(s), the numerator polynomial and of Q(s), the denominator polynomial in a
transfer function must be real. Therefore all poles and zeros if complex must occur in conjugate pairs.
2. In a transfer function, the degree of numerator polynomial is ___________ than the degree of the
denominator polynomial.
a) greater than
b) less than
c) equal to
d) less than or equal to
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In a transfer function, the degree of numerator polynomial is less than or equal to than the degree
of the denominator polynomial. And the degree of the numerator polynomial of Z21(s) or Y21(s) is less than or
equal to the degree of the denominator polynomial plus one.
3. The real parts of all poles and zeros in a driving point function must be?
a) zero
b) negative
c) zero or negative
d) positive
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The real parts of all poles and zeros in a driving point function must be zero or negative but
should not be positive and the complex or imaginary poles and zeros must occur in conjugate pairs.
4. If the real part of driving point function is zero, then the pole and zero must be?
a) complex
b) simple
c) one complex pole
d) one complex zero
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: If the real part of driving point function is zero, then the pole and zero must be simple but should
not contain any complex pole or complex zero.
5. The degree of the numerator polynomial and denominator polynomial in a driving point function may differ
by?
a) 0
102
b) 1
c) 0 or 1
d) 2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The degree of numerator polynomial and denominator polynomial in a driving point function
may differ by zero or one. And the polynomials P(s) and Q(s) may not have any missing terms between the
highest and lowest degrees unless all even or odd terms are missing.
6. The lowest degree in numerator polynomial and denominator polynomial in a driving point function may
differ by at most __________
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The lowest degree in numerator polynomial and denominator polynomial in a driving point
function may differ by at most one and the coefficients in the polynomials P(s) and Q(s) of network function
must be real and positive.
7. The coefficients in the denominator polynomial of the transfer function must be?
a) positive
b) negative
c) positive or zero
d) negative or zero
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The coefficients in the denominator polynomial of the transfer function must be positive but
should not be negative and the coefficients in the polynomials P(s) and Q(s) of transfer function must be real..
8. The coefficients in the numerator polynomial of the transfer function may be?
a) must be negative
b) must be positive
c) may be positive
d) may be negative
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The coefficients in the numerator polynomial of the transfer function may be negative and the
complex or imaginary poles and zeros must occur in conjugate pairs.
103
9. The denominator polynomial in a transfer function may not have any missing terms between the highest and
the lowest degree, unless?
a) all odd terms are missing
b) all even terms are missing
c) all even or odd terms are missing
d) all even and odd terms are missing
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The denominator polynomial in a transfer function may not have any missing terms between the
highest and the lowest degree, unless all even or odd terms are missing and the polynomial P(s) may have
missing terms between the lowest and the highest degree.
10. The degree of numerator polynomial in a transfer function may be as small as _________ independent of
the degree of the denominator polynomial.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 0
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The degree of numerator polynomial in a transfer function may be as small as zero, independent
of the degree of the denominator polynomial and for the voltage transfer ratio and the current transfer ratio, the
maximum degree of P(s) must be equal to the degree of Q(s).
“Network Function for the One-Port and Two-Port”.
1. The ratio of voltage transform at first port to the voltage transform at the second port is called?
a) Voltage transfer ratio
b) Current transfer ratio
c) Transfer impedance
d) Transfer admittance
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Voltage transfer ratio is the ratio of voltage transform at first port to the voltage transform at the
second port and is denoted by G(s). G21 = V2(s)/V1(s) G12 = V1(s)/V2(s).
2. The ratio of the current transform at one port to current transform at other port is called?
a) Transfer admittance
b) Transfer impedance
c) Current transfer ratio
104
d) Voltage transfer ratio
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Current transfer ratio is the ratio of the current transform at one port to current transform at other
port and is denoted by α(s). α12(s) = I1(s)/I2(s) α21(s) = I2(s)/I1(s)
3. The ratio of voltage transform at first port to the current transform at the second port is called?
a) Voltage transfer ratio
b) Transfer admittance
c) Current transfer ratio
d) Transfer impedance
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Transfer impedance is the ratio of voltage transform at first port to the current transform at the
second port and is denoted by Z(s). Z21(s) = V2(s)/I1(s) Z12(s) = V1(s)/I2(s)
4. For the network shown in the figure, find the driving point impedance.
a) (s2-2s+1)/s
b) (s2+2s+1)/s
c) (s2-2s-1)/s
d) (s2+2s-1)/s
View Answer
5. Obtain the transfer function G21 (S) in the circuit shown below.
a) (s+1)/s
b) s+1
c) s
105
d) s/(s+1)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Applying Kirchhoff’s law V1 (S) = 2 I1 (S) + 2 sI1 (S) V2 (S) = I1 (S) X 2s Hence G21 (S) =
V2(s)/V1(s) =2 s/(2+2 s)=s/(s+1).
6. Determine the transfer function Z21 (S) in the circuit shown in question 5.
a) s
b) 2 s
c) 3 s
d) 4 s
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The transfer function Z21 (S) is Z21 (S) = V2(S)/I1(S). V2 (S) = I1 (S) X 2s. V2(S)/I1(S)=2s. On
substituting Z21 (S) = 2s.
7. Find the driving point impedance Z11 (S) in the circuit shown in question 5.
a) 2(s+2)
b) (s+2)
c) 2(s+1)
d) (s+1)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The driving point impedance Z11 (S) is Z11 (S)=V1(S)/I1(S). V1 (S) = 2 I1 (S) + 2 sI1 (S) => V1(S) =
(2+2s)I1(S) => V1(S)/I1(S) = 2(s+1). On substituting Z11 (S) = 2(S+1).
8. Obtain the transfer function G21 (s) in the circuit shown below.
a) (8 S+2)/(8 S+1)
b) (8 S+2)/(8 S+2)
c) (8 S+2)/(8 S+3)
d) (8 S+2)/(8 S+4)
View Answer
106
Answer: d
Explanation: From the circuit, the parallel combination of resistance and capacitance can be combined into
equivalent in impedance. Zeq(S) = 1/(2 S+1/2)=2/(4 S+1). Applying Kirchhoff’s laws, we have V2 (S) = 2 I1(S)
=> V1 (S) = I1 (S)[2/(4 S+1)+2] = I1 (S)[(8 S+4)/(4 S+1)] The transfer function G21 (s) = V2(s)/V1(s) =2 I1(S)/((8
S+4)/(4 S+1))I1(S) =(8 S+2)/(8 S+4).
9. Obtain the transfer function Z21(s) in the circuit shown in question 8.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The transfer function Z21(s) is Z21 (S) = V2(S)/I1(S). V2 (S) = 2 I1(S) => V2(S)/I1 =2. On substituting
Z21(s) = 2.
10. Determine the driving point impedance Z11(S) in the circuit shown in question 8.
a) (8 S+4)/(4 S+4)
b) (8 S+4)/(4 S+3)
c) (8 S+4)/(4 S+2)
d) (8 S+4)/(4 S+1)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The driving point impedance Z11(S) is Z11(S) = V1(s)/I1(s). V1(s) = I1(s)((2/(4s+1))+2) =
I1(s)((8s+4)/(4s+1)) => V1(s)/I1(s) = ((8s+4)/(4s+1)). On substituting we get Z11(S) = (8S+4)/(4S+1).
“Open Circuit Impedence(Z) Parameters”.
1. Two ports containing no sources in their branches are called?

a) active ports
b) passive ports
c) one port
d) three port
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Two ports containing no sources in their branches are called passive ports; among them are
power transmission lines and transformers.
2. Two ports containing sources in their branches are called?
a) three port
b) one port
c) passive ports
107
d) active ports
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Two ports containing sources in their branches are called active ports. A voltage and current is
assigned to each of the two ports.
3. In determining open circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2, which of the following are
dependent variables?
a) V1 and V2
b) I1 and I2
c) V1 and I2
d) I1 and V2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In determining open circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2; V1and V2 are dependent
variables and I1, I2 are independent variables i.e., dependent variables depend on independent variables.
4. In determining open circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2, which of the following are
independent variables?
a) I1 and V2
b) V1 and I2
c) I1 and I2
d) V1 and V2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: In determining open circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2; I1and I2 are independent
variables and V1, V2 are dependent variables. Independent variables are the variables that do not depend on any
other variable.
5. Which of the following expression is true in case of open circuit parameters?
a) V1 = Z11 V1 + Z12 I2
b) V1 = Z11I1 + Z12 V2
c) V1 = Z11I1 + Z12 I2
d) V2 = Z11I1 + Z12 I2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The expression relating the open circuit parameters Z11, Z12 and currents I1, I2 and voltage V1 is
V1 = Z11I1 + Z12 I2.
6. Which of the following expression is true in case of open circuit parameters?
a) V2 = Z21I2 + Z22 I2
108
b) V2 = Z21I1 + Z22 I2
c) V1 = Z21I2 + Z22 I2
d) V1 = Z21I1 + Z22 I2
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The expression relating the currents I1, I2 and voltage V1 and open circuit parameters Z21, Z22 is
V2 = Z21I1 + Z22 I2.
7. Find the Z – parameter Z11 in the circuit shown below.
a) 1
b) 1.5
c) 2
d) 2.5
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: For determining Z11, the current I2 is equal to zero. Now we obtain Zeq as 1+ (6×2)/(6+2)=2.5Ω.
So, Z11 = 2.5Ω.
8. The value of Z21 in the circuit shown in the question 7 is?
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: V2 is the voltage across the 4Ω impedance. The current through 4Ω impedance is I1/4. And V2 =
(I1/4) x 4 = I1. So, Z21 = 1Ω.
9. Find the value of Z12 in the circuit shown in the question 7.
a) 3
b) 2
c) 1
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The current through vertical 2Ω resistor is = I2/2. So, V1 = 2 x (I2/2). On solving and substituting
we get Z12 = 1Ω.
10. Determine the value of Z22 in the circuit shown in the question 7.
a) 0
109
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Open circuiting port 1, we get V2 = I2((2+2)||4) => V2 = I2 x 2 =>V2/I2 = 2. Therefore the value of
Z22 is 2Ω.
“Inter Connection of Two-Port Networks”.
1.In the circuit shown below, find the Z-parameter Z11.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The Z –parameter Z11 is V1/I1, port 2 is open circuited. V1 = (1+2)I1 => V1/I1 = 3 and on
substituting, we get Z11 = 3Ω.
2. In the circuit shown in question 1, find the Z-parameter Z12.
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) 1
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z12 is V2/I1 |I2=0. On open circuiting port 2 we obtain the equation, V1 = (2) I2 =>
V1/I1 = 2. On substituting we get Z12 = 2Ω.
a) 2
b) 4
c) 1
110
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z21 is V2/I1 |I2=0. On open circuiting port 2, we get V2 = (2)I1 => V2/I1 = 2. On
substituting we get Z21 = 2Ω.
a) 3
b)2
c) 4
d) 1
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z21 is V2/I2 |I1=0. This parameter is obtained by open circuiting port 1. So we get
V2 = (2 + 1)I2 => V2 = 3(I2) => V2/I2 = 3. On substituting Z21 = 3Ω.
5. In the circuit shown below, find the Z-parameter Z11.
a) 10
b) 15
c) 20
d) 25
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The Z –parameter Z11 is V1/I1, port 2 is open circuited. V1 = (10 + 5)I1 => V1/I1 = 15 and on
substituting, we get Z11 = 2.5Ω.
a) 15
b) 10
c) 5
d) 1
View Answer
111
Answer: c
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z12 is V2/I1 |I2=0. On open circuiting port 2 we obtain the equation, V1 = (5) I2 =>
V1/I1 = 5. On substituting we get Z12 = 5Ω.
7. From the circuits shown in question 1 in question 5, find the combined Z-parameter Z11.
a) 8
b) 18
c) 28
d) 38
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z11 is Z11 = Z11x + Z11y and Z11x = 3, Z11y = 15. On substituting we get Z11 = 3 +15 =
18Ω.
a) 4
b) 5
c) 6
d) 7
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z12 is Z12 = Z12x + Z12y and we have Z12x = 2, Z12y. On substituting we get Z12 = 2 +
5 = 7Ω.
a) 7
b) 6
c) 5
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z21 is Z21 = Z21x + Z21y and we have Z21x = 2, Z21y = 5. On substituting we get Z21 =
2 + 5 = 7Ω.
a) 38
b) 28
c) 18
d) 8
View Answer
112
Answer: b
Explanation: The Z-parameter Z22 is Z22 = Z22x + Z22y and we have Z22x = 3, Z22y = 25. On substituting we get Z22 =
3 +25 = 28Ω.
“Short Circuit Admittance(Y) Parameters”.
1. In determining short circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2, which of the following are
dependent variables?
a) V1 and V2
b) I1 and I2
c) V1 and I2
d) I1 and V2
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In determining short circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2; I1and I2 are dependent
variables and V1, V2 are independent variables i.e., dependent variables depend on independent variables.
2. In determining short circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2, which of the following are
independent variables?
a) I1 and V2
b) V1 and I2
c) I1 and I2
d) V1 and V2
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In determining short circuit impedance parameters, among V1, V2, I1, I2; V1and V2 are independent
variables and I1, I2 are dependent variables. Independent variables are the variables that do not depend on any
other variable.
3. Which of the following expression is true in case of short circuit parameters?
a) I1 = Y11 V1 + Y12 V2
b) I1 = Y11 I1 + Y12 V2
c) V1 = Y11 I1 + Y12 V2
d) V1 = Y11 V1 + Y12 V2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The expression relating the short circuit parameters Y11, Y12 and voltages V1, V2 and current is I1,
is I1 = Y11 V1 + Y12 V2.
4. Which of the following expression is true in case of short circuit parameters?
a) I2 = Y21I1 + Y22 I2
b) V2 = Y21I1 + Y22 V2
113
c) I2 = Y21V1 + Y22 V2
d) I2 = Y21V1 + Y22 I2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The expression relating the voltages V1, V2 and current is I2 and short circuit parameters Y11, Y12 is
I2 = Y21V1 + Y22V2.
5. The parameters Y11, Y12, Y21, Y22 are called?
a) Open circuit impedance parameters
b) Short circuit admittance parameters
c) Inverse transmission parameters
d) Transmission parameters
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The parameters Y11, Y12, Y21, Y22 are called short circuit admittance parameters also called network
functions as they are obtained by short circuiting port 1 or port 2.
6. Find the Y – parameter Y11 in the circuit shown below.
a) 2
b) 3/2
c) 1
d) 1/2
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: After short circuiting b-b’, the equation will be V1 = (I1) x 2. We know Y11 = I1/V1. From the
equation we get I1/V1 = 2. On substituting we get Y11 = 2 mho.
7. Find the Y – parameter Y21 in the circuit shown in question 6.
a) -1/4
b) 1/4
c) 1/2
d) -1/2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: After short circuiting b-b’, the equation will be -I2=I1 × 2/4=I1/2 and -I2= V1/4 and on solving and
substituting we get Y21 =I2/V1=-1/4 mho.
a) 3/8
b) 5/8
114
c) 7/8
d) 9/8
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: On short circuiting a-a’,we get Zeq = 8/5 Ω. V2=I2× 8/5. We know Y22 = I2/V2. We got I2/V1 = 5/8.
ON substituting we get Y22 = 5/8 mho.
a) 1/2
b) -1/2
c) -1/4
d) 1/4
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Short circuiting a-a’, -I1= 2/5 I2 and I2= 5 V2/8. On solving -I1= 2/5×5/8 V2= V2/4. We know
Y12 = I1/V2. We got I1/V2 = -1/4. So the value of Y12 will be -1/4 mho.
10. Which of the following equation is true in the circuit shown in question 6?
a) I1=0.5(V1)+0.25(V2)
b) I1=0.25(V1)+0.625(V2)
c) I1=-0.25(V1)+0.625(V2)
d) I1=0.5(V1)-0.25(V2)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: We got the admittance parameters as Y11 = 0.5, Y12 = -0.25, Y21 = -0.25, Y22= 0.625. So the
equations in terms of admittance parameters is
I1=0.5(V1)-0.25(V2) and I2=-0.25(V1)+0.625(V2).
“Transmission(ABCD) Parameters”.
1.In the circuit shown below, find the transmission parameter A.
a) 6/5
b) 5/6
c) 3/4
115
d) 4/3
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Open circuiting b-b‘, V1 = 6 I1, V2 = 5I1. On solving V1/V2 = 6/5. On substituting we get A =
V1/V2=6/5.
2. In the circuit shown above, find the transmission parameter C.
a) 4/5
b) 3/5
c) 2/5
d) 1/5
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: C = I1/V2 |I2=0. By open circuiting b-b‘ we get V2 = 5 I1 =>I1/V2 = 1/5. On substituting we get C =
I1/V2=1/5 Ω.
3. In the circuit shown above, find the transmission parameter B.
a) 15/5
b) 17/5
c) 19/5
d) 21/5
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The transmission parameter B is given by B = -V1/I2 |V2=0. Short circuiting b-b‘, -I2= 5/17 V1 => -
V1/I2 = 17/5. On substituting we get B=17/5 Ω.
4. In the circuit shown above, find the transmission parameter D.
a) 1/5
b) 3/5
c) 7/5
d) 9/5
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: D is a transmission parameter and is given by D = -I1/I2 |V2=0. Short circuiting b-b‘, I1= 7/17
V1 and-I2= 5/17 V1. So we get I1/I2 = 7/5. So D=7/5.
5. The hybrid parameter h11 is called?
a) short circuit input impedance
b) short circuit forward current gain
c) open circuit reverse voltage gain
116
d) open circuit output admittance
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: h11=V1/I1 |V2=0. So the hybrid parameter h11 is called short circuit input impedance.
6. The hybrid parameter h21 is called?
a) open circuit output admittance
b) open circuit reverse voltage gain
c) short circuit forward current gain
d) short circuit input impedance
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: h21=I2/I1 |V2=0. So the hybrid parameter h21 is called short circuit forward current gain.
7. In the circuit shown below, find the h-parameter h11.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: h11=V1/I1 |V2=0. So short circuiting b-b‘, V1 = I1((2||2)+1) = 2I1 => V1/I1= 2. On substituting we get
h11 = V1/I1= 2Ω.
8. In the circuit shown in question 7, find the h-parameter h21.
a) 1
b) -1
c) 1/2
d) -1/2
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Short circuiting b-b‘, h21 = I2/I1 when V2=0 and -I2= I1/2 => I2/I1 = -1/2. So h21= -1/2.
a) 1/2
b) -1/2
c) 1
d) -1
View Answer
117
Answer: a
Explanation: Open circuiting a-a‘ we get V1=Iy×2 and
Iy=I2/2 and V2=Ix×4 and Ix=I2/2. On solving and substituting, we get h12 =V1/V2=1/2.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 1/2
d) 3/2
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Open circuiting a-a‘ we get V1=Iy×2 and Iy=I2/2 and V2=Ix×4 and Ix=I2/2. On solving and
substituting, we get h22 =I2/V2=1/2 Ω.
“Inner Relationships of Different Parameters”.
1. For the given information Z11 = 3, Z12 = 1, Z21 = 2, Z22 = 1. Find the value of Y11.
a) 1
b) -1
c) 2
d) -2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Y11 = Z22/∆z and ∆z=3-2=1 and Z22 = 1. So on substituting we get Y11= 1/1=1.
2. From the information provided in question 1, find the value of Y12.
a) -2
b) 2
c) -1
d) 1
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Y12= -Z12/∆z and ∆z=3-2=1 and Z12 = 1. So on substituting we get Y12=- 1/1=-1.
a) 2
b) -2
c) 1
d) -1
View Answer
118
Answer: b
Explanation: We have the relation Y21=- Z21/∆z. ∆z=3-2=1 and given Z21 = 2. On substituting we get Y21=- 2/1=-
2.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The relation between Y22 and Z11 is Y22= Z11/∆z and ∆z=3-2=1 and given Z11= 3. On substituting
we get Y22= 3/1=3.
5. The value ∆y in the question 1 is?
a) 0
b) 1
c) 2
d) 3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: ∆y is the determinant of y parameters. The value ∆y is (Y11)(Y22)-(Y12)(Y21). On substituting the
values we get ∆y = (1)(3)-(-2)(-1)=1.
6. The product of ∆y and ∆z in the question 1 is?
a) 3
b) 2
c) 1
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: ∆y is the determinant of y parameters and ∆z is the determinant of z parameters. And we obtained
∆y = 1 and ∆z = 1. So their product = (1) (1) = 1.
7. The relation between Z11 and Y parameters is?
a) Z11 = Y22/∆y
b) Z11 = -Y22/∆y
c) Z11 = Y12/∆y
d) Z11 = (-Y12)/∆y
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: V1=(Y22/∆y)I1-(Y12/∆y)I2. The relation between Z11 and Y parameters is Z11 = Y22/∆y.
119
a) Z12 = Y12/∆y
b) Z12 = (-Y12)/∆y
c) Z12 = (-Y22)/∆y
d) Z12 = Y22/∆y
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: V1=(Y22/∆y)I1-(Y12/∆y)I2. The relation between Z12 and Y parameters is Z12 = (-Y12)/∆y.
a) Z21 = Y21/∆y
b) Z21 = Y12/∆y
c) Z21 = (-Y21)/∆y
d) Z21 = (-Y12)/∆y
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: V2=(-Y21/∆y)I1+(Y11/∆y)I2. The relation between Z21 and Y parameters is Z21= (-Y21)/∆y.
a) Z22 = (-Y11)/∆y
b) Z22 = Y21/∆y
c) Z22 = (-Y21)/∆y
d) Z22 = Y11/∆y
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: V2=(-Y21/∆y)I1+(Y11/∆y)I2. The relation between Z22 and Y parameters is Z22= Y11/∆y.
UNIT-V
FILTERS
“Filter Networks”.
1. The value of one decibel is equal to?

a) 0.115 N
b) 0.125 N
c) 0.135 N
d) 0.145 N
View Answer
120
Answer: a
Explanation: The value of one decibel is equal to 0.115 N. One decibel = 0.115 N where N is the number of
nepers and N = loge(V1/V2).
2. A filter which passes without attenuation all frequencies up to the cut-off frequency fc and attenuates all
other frequencies greater than fc is called?
a) high pass filter
b) low pass filter
c) band elimination filter
d) band pass filter
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A filter is called a low pass filter if it passes all frequencies up to the cut-off frequency fc without
attenuation and attenuates all other frequencies greater than fc. This transmits currents of all frequencies from
zero up to the cut-off frequency.
3. A filter which attenuates all frequencies below a designated cut-off frequency fc and passes all other
frequencies greater than fc is called?
a) band elimination filter
b) band pass filter
c) low pass filter
d) high pass filter
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: A filter is called high pass filter if attenuates all frequencies below a designated cut-off frequency
fc and passes all other frequencies greater than fc. Thus the pass band of this filter is the frequency range above
fc and the stop band is the frequency range below fc.
4. A filter that passes frequencies between two designated cut-off frequencies and attenuates all other
frequencies is called?
a) high pass filter
b) band elimination filter
c) band pass filter
d) low pass filter
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: A band pass filter passes frequencies between two designated cut-off frequencies and attenuates
all other frequencies. A band pass filter has two cut-off frequencies and will have the pass band f2-f1; f1 is the
lower cut-off frequency, f2 is the upper cut-off frequency.
5. A filter that passes all frequencies lying outside a certain range, while it attenuates all frequencies between
the two designated frequencies is called?
a) low pass filter
121
b) high pass filter
c) band elimination filter
d) band pass filter
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: A band elimination filter passes all frequencies lying outside a certain range, while it attenuates
all frequencies between the two designated frequencies. It is also referred to as band stop filter.
6. The expression of the characteristic impedance of a symmetrical T-section is?
a) ZOT=√(Z12/4-Z1Z2)
b) ZOT=√(Z12/4+Z1)
c) ZOT=√(Z12/4+Z2)
d) ZOT=√(Z12/4+Z1Z2)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: For a T-section, the value of input impedance when it is terminated in Zo is
Zin=(Z1/2)+(Z2((Z1/2)+Zo))/((Z1/2)+Z2+Zo) and Zin=Zo. On solving, the expression of the characteristic impedance
of a symmetrical T-section is ZOT=√(Z12/4+Z1Z2).
7. The expression of the open circuit impedance Zoc is?
a) Zoc=Z1/2+Z2
b) Zoc=Z2/2+Z2
c) Zoc=Z1/2+Z1
d) Zoc=Z1/2-Z2
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: On open circuiting the port 2 of T-section, we get the expression of the open circuit impedance
Zoc as Zoc=Z1/2+Z2.
8. The expression of short circuit impedance Zsc is?
a) Zsc=(Z12-4Z1Z2)/(2Z1-4Z2)
b) Zsc=(Z12+4Z1Z2)/(2Z1+4Z2)
c) Zsc=(Z12-4Z1Z2)/(2Z1+4Z2)
d) Zsc=(Z12+4Z1Z2)/(2Z1-4Z2)
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: On short circuiting the port 2 of T-section, we get the expression of short circuit impedance Zsc as
Zsc=(Z1/2)+((Z1/2)xZ2)/((Z1/2)+Z2). On solving we get Zsc=(Z12+4Z1Z2)/(2Z1+4Z2).
9. The relation between ZOT, Zoc, Zsc is?
a) ZOT=√ZocZsc
122
b) Zoc=√(ZOT Zsc)
c) Zsc=√(ZOT Zoc)
d) Zoc=√(ZOT Zoc)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Zoc=Z1/2+Z2 and Zsc=(Z12+4Z1Z2)/(2Z1+4Z2) => ZocxZsc=Z1Z2+Z12/4 =Zo2T. The relation between ZOT,
Zoc, Zsc is ZOT=√ZocZsc.
10. The value of sinh⁡ϒ/2 in terms of Z1 and Z2 is?
a) sinh⁡ϒ/2=√(4Z1/Z2)
b) sinh⁡ϒ/2=√(Z1/Z2)
c) sinh⁡ϒ/2=√(Z1/4Z2)
d) sinh⁡ϒ/2=√(2Z1/Z2)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: sinhϒ/2=√((1/2(coshϒ-1)/(1/2(1+Z1/2Z2-1))). The value of sinh⁡ϒ/2 in terms of Z1 and Z2 is
sinh⁡ϒ/2=√(Z1/4Z2).
“Classification of Pass Band and Stop Band”.
1. The relation between α, β, ϒ is?

a) α = ϒ + jβ
b) ϒ = α + jβ
c) β = ϒ + jα
d) α = β + jϒ
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: We know that the propogation constant is a complex function and the real part of the complex
propogation constant is a measure of the change in magnitude of the current or voltage in the network known
as attenuation constant and imaginary part is a measure of the difference in phase between the input and output
currents or voltages known as phase shift constant. ϒ = α + jβ.
2. If Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, then |Z1/4 Z2| is real, then the value of α is?
a) α = sinh-1⁡√( Z1/4 Z2)
b) α = sinh-1⁡⁡√( Z1/Z2)
c) α = sinh-1⁡√( 4 Z1/Z2)
d) α = sinh-1⁡⁡√( Z1/2 Z2)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance and |Z1/4 Z2| is real. |Z1/4 Z2| > 0. The value of α is α = sinh-
1
⁡√(Z1/4 Z2).
123
3. If Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, then |Z1/4 Z2| is real, then?
a) |Z1/4 Z2|=0
b) |Z1/4 Z2| < 0
c) |Z1/4 Z2| > 0
d) | Z1/4 Z2|>= 0
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If Z1 and Z2 are same type of reactances, then √(Z1/4 Z2) should be always positive implies that
|Z1/4 Z2|>0.
4. Which of the following expression is true if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance?
a) sinh⁡α/2 sin⁡β/2=0
b) coshα/2 sin⁡β/2=0
c) coshα/2 cos⁡β/2=0
d) sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2=0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: If Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, then the real part of sinhϒ/2 = sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2 + jcoshα/2
sin⁡β/2 should be zero. So sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2=0.
5. Which of the following expression is true if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance?
a) sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2=x
b) coshα/2 cos⁡β/2=0
c) coshα/2 sin⁡β/2=x
d) sinhα/2 sin⁡β/2=0
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: If Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, then the imaginary part of sinhϒ/2 = sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2 +
jcoshα/2 sin⁡β/2 should be some value. So coshα/2 sin⁡β/2=x.
6. The value of α if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance?
a) 0
b) π/2
c) π
d) 2π
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2=0 and coshα/2 sin⁡β/2=x, the value of α if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance
is α= 0.
124
7. The value of β if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance?
a) 2π
b) π
c) π/2
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The value of β if Z1, Z2 are same type of reactances, then
sinhα/2 cos⁡β/2=0 and coshα/2 sin⁡β/2=x. So the value of β is β= π.
8. If Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, and if α = 0, then the value of β is?
a) β=2 sin-1⁡(√(Z1/4 Z2))
b) β=2 sin-1⁡(√(4 Z1/Z2))
c) β=2 sin-1⁡(√(4 Z1/Z2))
d) β=2 sin-1⁡(√(Z1/Z2))
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: If α = 0, sin β/2 = x(√(Z1/4 Z2). But sine can have a maximum value of 1. Therefore the above
solution is valid only for Z1/4 Z2, and having a maximum value of unity. It indicates the condition of pass band
with zero attenuation and follows the condition as -1 < Z1/4 Z2 <= 0. So β=2 sin-1⁡(√(Z1/4 Z2)).
9. If the value of β is π, and Z1, Z2 are same type of reactance, then the value of β is?
a) α=2 cosh-1⁡√(Z1/2 Z2)
b) α=2 cosh-1⁡√(Z1/Z2)
c) α=2 cosh-1⁡√(4 Z1/Z2)
d) α=2 cosh-1⁡√(Z1/4 Z2)
View Answer
10. The relation between Zoπ, Z1, Z2, ZoT is?

a) ZoT = Z1Z2/Zoπ
b) Zoπ = Z1Z2/ZoT
c) ZoT = Z1Z1/Zoπ
d) ZoT = Z2Z2/Zoπ
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The characteristic impedance of a symmetrical π-section can be expressed in terms of T. Zoπ =
Z1Z2/ZoT.
“Constant-K Low Pass Filter”.
125
1. A network either T or π, is said to be of the constant-k type if Z1 and Z2 of the network satisfy the relation?
a) Z1Z2 = k
b) Z1Z2 = k2
c) Z1Z2 = k3
d) Z1Z2 = k4
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Z1,Z2 are inverse if their product is a constant, independent of frequency, k is real constant, that is
the resistance. k is often termed as design impedance or nominal impedance of the constant k-filter.
2. In the circuit shown below, find the value of Z1.
a) jωL
b) 2 jωL
c) jωL/2
d) 4 jωL
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The constant k, T or π type filter is also known as the prototype because other more complex
networks can be derived from it. From the given figure, the value of Z1 is jωL.
3. In the circuit shown in the question 2, find the value of Z2.
a) jωC
b) 2 jωC
c) 1/jωC
d) 1/2 jωC
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: From the prototype T section and prototype π section shown in figures, we get the value of Z2 is
1/jωC.
4. The value of Z1Z2 in the circuit shown in the question 2 is?
a) L/C
b) C/L
c) 1/LC
126
d) LC
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Z1 = jωL and Z2 = 1/jωC. So the product Z1Z2 is jωL x 1/jωC = L/C.
5. Determine the value of k in the circuit shown in the question 2.
a) √LC
b) √((L/C) )
c) √((C/L) )
d) √((1/CL) )
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: We got Z1Z2 = L/C. And we know Z1Z2= k2. So k2 = L/C. So the value of k is √(L/C).
6. The cut-off frequency of the constant k-low pass filter is?
a) 1/√LC
b) 1/(π√LC)
c) √LC
d) π√LC
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Z1/4Z2 = 0. Z1 = jωL and Z2 = 1/jωC. On solving the cut-off frequency of the constant k-low pass
filter is fc= 1/(π√LC).
7. The value of α in the pass band of constant k-low pass filter is?
a) 2 cosh-1⁡(fc/f)
b) cosh-1⁡⁡(fc/f)
c) cosh-1⁡(f/fc)
d) 2 cosh-1⁡(f/fc)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The value of α in the pass band of constant k-low pass filter is α= 2 cosh-1⁡(f/fc).
8. The value of β in the attenuation band of constant k-low pass filter is?
a) 0
b) π
c) π/2
d) π/4
View Answer
127
Answer: b
Explanation: We know that in the attenuation band, Z1/4Z2 < -1 i.e., f/fc < 1. So the value of β in the pass band
of constant k-low pass filter is β= π.
9. The value of α in the attenuation band of constant k-low pass filter is?
a) α=2 cosh-1⁡(fc/f)
b) α=cosh-1⁡(f/fc)
c) α=2 cosh-1⁡(f/fc)
d) α=cosh-1⁡(fc/f)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: α = 2 cosh-1[Z1/4Z2] and Z1/4Z2 = f/fc. On substituting we get α = 2 cosh-1⁡(f/fc).
10. The value of α in the pass band of constant k-low pass filter is?
a) π
b) π/4
c) π/2
d) 0
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: We know that in the pass band, the condition is -1 < Z1/4Z2 < 0. So α= π.
“m-Derived T-Section”.
1.The relation between ZoT and ZoT‘ in the circuits shown below.
a) ZoT = ZoT‘
b) ZoT = 2 ZoT‘
c) ZoT = 3 ZoT‘
d) ZoT = 4 ZoT‘
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The relation between ZoT and ZoT’ is ZoT = ZoT’ where ZoT’ is the characteristic impedance of the
modified (m-derived) T-network.
2. The value of Z2’ in terms of Z1, Z2 from the circuits shown in question 1 is?
a) Z2‘=Z2/4 m (1-m2 )+Z2/m
b) Z2‘=Z1/4 m (1-m2 )+Z1/m
c) Z2‘=Z2/4 m (1-m2 )+Z1/m
d) Z2‘=Z1/4 m (1-m2 )+Z2/m
View Answer
128
Answer: d
Explanation: As ZoT = ZoT’, √(Z12/4+Z1Z2)=√(m2 Z12/4+m Z2 ). On solving, Z2‘=Z1/(4 m (1-m2))+Z2/m.
‘
3. The relation between Zoπ and Zoπ’ in the circuits shown below is?
a) Zoπ = 2 Zoπ’
b) Zoπ = 4 Zoπ’
c) Zoπ = Zoπ’
d) Zoπ = 3 Zoπ’
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The characteristic impedances of the prototype and its modified sections have to be equal for
matching. The relation between Zoπ and Zoπ‘ is Zoπ = Zoπ’.
4. The value of Z1‘ in terms of Z1, Z2 from the circuits shown in question 3 is?
a) Z1‘=(m Z2(Z2 4 m)/(1-m2 ))/m Z1(Z2 4 m/(1-m2 ))
b) Z1‘=(m Z1(Z2 4 m)/(1-m2 ))/m Z2(Z2 4 m/(1-m2 ))
c) Z1‘=(m Z1(Z2 4 m)/(1-m2 ))/m Z1(Z2 4 m/(1-m2 ))
d) Z1‘=(m Z1(Z2 4 m)/(1-m2 ))/m Z1(Z1 4 m/(1-m2 ))
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: As Zoπ = Zoπ’, √(Z1Z2/(1+Z1/4 Z2))=√(((Z1‘ Z2)/m)/(1+(Z1‘)/(4 Z2/m))). On solving, Z1‘=(m Z1(Z2 4
m)/(1-m2 ))/m Z1(Z2 4 m/(1-m2 )) .
5. The value of resonant frequency in the m-derived low pass filter is?
a) fr=1/(√(LC(1+m2 ) ))
b) fr=1/(√(πLC(1+m2 ) ))
c) fr=1/(√(LC(1-m2 ) ))
d) fr=1/(√(πLC(1-m2 ) ))
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: ωr2 = 1/(LC(1-m2)). So the value of resonant frequency in the m-derived low pass filter is
fr=1/√(πLC(1-m2 ) ).
6. The cut-off frequency of the low pass filter is?
a) 1/√LC
b) 1/(π√LC)
c) 1/√L
d) 1/(π√L)
View Answer
129
Answer: b
Explanation: To determine the cut-off frequency of the low pass filter we place m = 0. So fc=1/(π√LC).
7. The resonant frequency of m-derived low pass filter in terms of the cut-off frequency of low pass filter is?
a) fc/√(1-m2 )
b) fc/√(1+m2 )
c) fc/(π√(1-m2 ))
d) fc/(π√(1+m2 ))
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: If a sharp cut-off is desired, the frequency at infinity should be near to fc. The resonant frequency
of m-derived low pass filter in terms of the cut-off frequency of low pass filter is fr=fc/√(1-m2).
8. The expression of m of the m-derived low pass filter is?
a) m=√(1+(fc/fr)2 )
b) m=√(1+(fc/f)2)
c) m=√(1-(fc/fr)2 )
d) m=√(1-(fc/f)2 )
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: As fr=fc/√(1-m2). The expression of m of the m-derived low pass filter is m=√(1-(fc/fr)2 ).
9. Given a m-derived low pass filter has cut-off frequency 1 kHz, design impedance of 400Ω and the resonant
frequency of 1100 Hz. Find the value of k.
a) 400
b) 1000
c) 1100
d) 2100
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The value of k is equal to the design impedance. Given design impedance is 400Ω. So, k = 400.
10. The value of m from the information provided in question 9.
a) 0.216
b) 0.316
c) 0.416
d) 0.516
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: m=√(1-(fc/fr)2) fc = 1000, fr = 1100. On substituting m=√(1-(1000/1100)2)=0.416.
130
14. ASSIGNMENT TOPICS WITH
MAERIALS
Assignment Questions and Answers
UNIT-I
1. Explain the Faradays laws?
Solution:
Consider an iron ring on which a coil is wound. Most rings are made like anchor rings in that
their cross selection is circular. Such a ring is called a toroid. Whenever a current is flowing
through the coil there will be magnetic flux produced and the path fallowed by the magnetic flux
is known as magnetic circuit.
Reluctance of magnetic circuit is defined as the ratio of magneto motive
FARADAYS LAWS OF ELECTRO MAGNETIC INDUCTION:

In 1831, Micheal Faraday formulated two laws on the bases of experiments. These laws are
called Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction.
FIRST LAW:
First Law of Faraday's Electromagnetic Induction state that whenever a conductor are placed in a
varying magnetic field emf are induced which is called induced emf, if the conductor circuit are
closed current are also induced which is called induced current.
(OR)
Whenever a current carrying conductor is rotated in magnetic field it will induces an emf.
SECOND LAW:
131
Second Law of Faraday's Electromagnetic
c Induction state that the induced emf is equal to the
rate of change of flux linkages (flux linkages is the product of turns, n of the coil and the flux
associated with it).
Explanation:
Consider a magnet approaching towards a coil. Here we consider two instants of time T 1 and
time T2.
Flux linkage with the coil at time, T1= NΦ1Weber (wb)
Flux linkage with the coil at time, T2=NΦ2wb
Change in flux linkage = N (Φ2–Φ1)
Let this change in flux linkage be, Φ = Φ2–Φ1
So, the Change in flux linkage = NΦ
Now the rate of change of flux linkage = NΦ / t
Take derivative on right hand side we will get The rate of change of flux linkage = NdΦ/dt
But according to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, the rate of change of flux linkage is
equal to induced emf.
Therefore,
According to lenz’s law,

Where Φ in weber, Φ = B * A
B = magnetic field strength
A = area of the coil
From this, Faraday concluded that whenever there is relative motion between conductor and a
magnetic field, the flux linkage with a coil changes and this change in flux induces a voltage
across a coil.
2. Explain the concept of self and mutual inductance?
Solution:
Self Induction:
Inductance is the property of the circuit element which will oppose any change of current
through it. By Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction, it fallows that whenever there is
change of flux linking with a coil with time, and then there will be an induced emf in the coil.
The induced emf is proportional to the rate of change flux linkages of the coil.
Where N is the number of turns in the coil and Φ is the flux in weber in the coil.
132
The negative sign indicates that the direction of induced emf is such that it opposes the every
cause which is producing it, also known as LENZ’S law. Since the flux in the coil is directly
proportional to current flowing in it, the emf induced is proportional to the rate of change of
current.
If the current I and flux linkages refer to the same physical system, than the parameter L is
called self inductance. It is measured in HENRYS.
Mutual Inductance:
Let us consider that there are two coils which are placed on the same magnetic core such that the
flux produced by current flowing through one coil completely links with the other coils also. Let
the coil1 is connected to AC supply and coil2 is open circuit.
A current flowing in the first coil produces a flux as shown in fig. The direction of time varying
flux is given by right hand thumb rule. The flux produced by current not only links with the coil1
but also links with coil2. The emf induced in coil1 is called self induced emf.
The proportionality constant M21 between induced emf in the second coil and rate of change of
current in the first coil is called mutual inductance. Any two such coils are said to be
magnetically coupled.
The unit of mutual inductance is HENRY. The mutual inductance between two coils is said to be
1 Henry when a change of current of 1 Amp/Sec in one coil produces a mutual induced emf of 1
volt in the other coil.
Self induced emf in coil1,
Mutual induced emf in the coil2,
Let us assume that second coil also carries a current of i2 as shown in fig, which in turn produces
a self induced emf in coil2 and a mutual induced emf in coil1.
Self induced emf in coil2
133
Mutual induced emf in the coil1=
In practice all the flux produced by current in one coil may not completely link with the other
coil. Depending on the position and orientation of the two coils, only a fraction of the flux may
be linking with the other coil. Then the two circuits are said to be loosely coupled and if all the
flux is linking with the other coil, then they are said to tightly coupled.
3. Explain the following terms?

a) What is coefficient of coupling? Derive the formula for K?
b) Discuss dot notation?
Solution:
Coefficient of Coupling:
It is the factor which indicates the degree of coupling between the coupled coils given by
Expressing (1) in terms of self and mutual inductances,
134
If M21 = M12 = M then we get,
This will be equal to 1 if coils are coupled tightly
Coefficient of coupling is also defined as the ratio of mutual flux to total flux. It is always less
than one (K<=1) (this is the principle used in transformer).
Dot Notation
The Polarity or Dot Notation for a device with mutual inductance designates the relative
instantaneous current directions of such device's winding leads.
The physical criteria of this notation is to preserve a proper magnetic flow circuit direction inside
the material. Keeping all current entering a transformer or coupled inductances, in phase, through
dotted leads or ports will keep the magnetic flow circulating without canceling each other, and
the device will work under their rated efficiency.
Entering current on different dotted ports -one in a dotted port and the other with an un-dotted
port- will cause the magnetic flow components to subtract each other, making the device
working inefficiently. This criteria holds for devices with several coils, in order to have each of
them aggregating in an additive way by entering dotted ports.
Leads of primary and secondary windings are said to be of the same polarity when instantaneous
current entering the primary winding lead results in instantaneous current leaving the secondary
winding lead as though the two leads were a continuous circuit. In the case of two windings
wound around the same core in parallel, for example, the polarity will be the same on the same
ends: A sudden (instantaneous) current in the first coil will induce a voltage opposing the sudden
increase (Lenz's law) in the first and also in the second coil, because the inductive magnetic field
produced by the current in the first coil traverses the two coils in the same manner. The second
coil will, therefore, show an induced current opposite in direction to the inducing current in the
first coil. Both leads behave like a continuous circuit, one current entering into the first lead and
another current leaving the second lead.
Referring to the circuit diagrams below:[dubious – discuss] The circuit polarity signs '+' and '-'
indicate the relative polarities of the induced voltages in both coils, i.e. how an instantaneous
(sudden) magnetic field traversing the primary and secondary coils induces a voltage in both
coils.
135
The instantaneous polarities of the voltages across each inductor with respect to the dotted
terminals are the same.
The circuit arrows indicate example applied and resultant relative current directions. The '+' and
'-' polarities in the diagram are not the voltages driving the currents.
The instantaneous directions of the current entering the primary inductor at its dotted end and the
current leaving of the secondary inductor at its dotted end are the same.
Subtractive polarity transformer designs are shown in the upper circuit diagrams. Additive
polarity transformer designs are shown in the lower circuit diagrams.
4. Discuss series and parallel magnetic circuits?
Solution:
Composite Magnetic Circuits
Consider a circular ring made from different materials of lengths l1, l2 and l3, cross-sectional
areas a1, a2 and a3 and relative permeability r1, r2 andr3 respectively with a cut of
length lg known as air-gap. The total reluctance is the arithmetic sum of individual reluctances as
they are joined in series.
136
Or Total ampere-turns required
= Sum of ampere-turns required for individual parts of the magnetic circuit.

Parallel Magnetic Circuits
In series circuits, all parts of the magnetic circuit carry same flux and total ampere-turns required
to create a given flux is the arithmetic sum of the ampere-turns required for individual parts of
the circuit.
But if the various paths of the magnetic circuit are in parallel, as shown in Fig. 4 the ampere-
turns required for the combination is equal to the ampere-turns required to create the given flux
in one path.
For example, for the circuit shown in Fig. 4 paths ABCD and AFED are in parallel, so ampere-
turns required creating flux in path ABCD is equal to ampere-turns required to create
flux in path AFED and also equal to the ampere-turns required for both of the paths.
Hence total ampere-turns required for magnetic circuit shown in Fig. 4.
= AT for path DA + AT for path ABCD
= AT for path DA + AT for path AFED
5. For the given network draw a graph and a tree. Select suitable tree branch voltage
and write the cut-set schedule.Write equationfor the branch voltages in terms of
tree branch?
137
Solution:
No of nodes of a tree, nt = 6
No of tree branches, n= 6-1 = 5
Cut-set schedule:
Treebranch voltages Branch voltages (v)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 -1 0 1 0 -1 0 0 1 0 0 -1 1
2 -1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0
4 -1 1 0 0 -1 0 1 0 0 0 -1 1
5 -1 1 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tree Branch Basic Cut-Set

e1 1, 3, 5, 8, 11, 12
e2 1, 4, 3, 9
e3 4, 5, 10, 11
e4 1, 2, 5, 7, 11, 12
e5 1, 2, 5, 6
The equations are, r1 = - e1 - e2 - e4 - e5
138
r2 = e4 + e5
r3 = e1 + e2
r4 = - e2 + e3
r5 = - e1 - e3 - e4 - e5
r6 = e5
r7 = e4
r8 = e1
r9 = e2
r10 = e3
r11 = - e1 - e3 - e4
r12 = e1 + e4
6. Briefly discuss the concept of duality?
Solution:
Duality and Dual Networks
Duals: Two circuits are said to be dual of each other, if the mesh equations characterize one of
them has the same mathematical form as the nodal equations that characterize the other.
Principle of Duality: Identical behavior patterns observed between voltages and currents
between two independent circuits illustrate the principle of duality.
Ex: 1) series R-L-C circuit:
Parallel G-C-Lcircuit:
139
From that (1) and (2) are mathematically identical, so they are duals. Some dual elements:
Voltage(V)Current(I)
Resistor(R)Conductance(G)
Inductor(I)Capacitor(C)
KVLKCL
V(t)I(t)
Meshnodal
Seriesparallel
VsinwtIcoswt
Opencircuitshortcircuit
Thevenin Norton
Linktwig
Cutsettieset
Treeco-tree
Switchinseries(gettingclosed)switchinginparallel(gettingopened)etc.
Procedure to obtain a Dual Network:

These rules illustrated below are only for planar or flat networks which do not have any of their
branches crossing other branches1.
Place a dot in every loop of the network whose dual is obtained and a dot outside the
network. Each dot is numbered according to the loop in which it is placed. The outside
dot is called the reference node and give number as 0.
Connect two dots by a line through each branch. The dots are the nodes of the dual
network between two nodes; the element to be connected is the dual of the element
crossed by the line.
When sources are included, then the line joining the dots should intersect the sources
also; between these two nodes the dual of the source is included.
The polarity of the source is decided by the fallowing rule. A voltage or current source
which drives a current in clockwise in ith loop, then place a positive polarity at ith the
dual network. Negative if it is opposite.
Ex:
Inverse Networks: If two impedances Za, Zb which are duals of each other are expressed in the
form of Za × Zb = K2, where K is a positive number of independent of frequency, then the two
140
impedances are said to be inverse or reciprocal. The inversion is said to be about K.
7. Wright about Loop and Nodal methods of analysis of networks with

dependent and independent voltage and current sources?
Solution:
Choice of independent branch currents:
To determine the number of independent branch currents, consider the tree of a given graph
which is connected sub graph with no closed path. The addition of each link branch to the tree
gives rise to different closed path. Hence the opening or removal of the links destroys all
closed paths, which results in forcing all branch currents to zero. Thus, if we set all link branch
currents to zero, the currents in all branches of the network automatically to zero. We can
conclude that tree branch currents are dependent on link branch currents and can be expressed
uniquely in terms of link branch currents. This shows for a given network with b branches and
n nodes, the number of independent branch currents equal to number of links is (b- (n-1)) = (b-
n+1).
The dependent branch currents or tree branch currents can be expressed in a unique way in
terms of link branch currents using the row of the tie-matrix [C].
141
Hence to solve a given network, we have to determine the independent branch currents, in
terms of which other variables can be determined. To determine these independent branch
currents we formulate equations by equations by applying KVL to each of the loops, and these
equations are called as loop equations and the variables in which equations are formulated are
called the loop currents. This method of analysis is called as loop method of analysis and is
based on KVL.
To analyze this see the fallowing example, if the branch currents are i1,i2,––––––,i8 then they
can be expressed as link branch currents i1,i2,i3,i4 as
[i] = [C] [i1]
Where [i] = column of branch currents

[i1] = column of link branch currents
[C] = basic tie-set matrix
The tree branch currents for above example are can express as below,
i5= i1 - i4 i6= —i1 +i2 i7=—i2+i3

i8= i3 + i4
The loop equations are formulated using above equations.
Another way to find loop currents:
Another way commonly employed in formulating the loop equations using loop currents as the
independent variables is illustrated below. We can use the window method to arrive at the
142
number of independent loop currents if it is planar network. This method is illustrated and
loop equations are formulated using KVL in terms of loop current variables.
Consider the network shown in fig. the choice of loop currents in loop equations formulated
below. Let I1, I2 and I3 are the loop currents in the loops 1, 2 and 3 flowing in the elements
forming that loop. The loop equations are obtained by applying KVL for each of the loop in
the network.
Loop1:
- Ea + I1 Za + Eb + (I1 -I2) Zb = 0 ⇨I1(Za +Zb) - I2 Zb = (Ea -Eb) – (1)
Loop2: (I2 -I1) Zb - Eb + I2 Zc + (I2 -I3) Zd = Eb ⇨-I1 Zb + I2 (Zb+ Zc+Zd) - I3 Zd =
Eb -- (2) Loop3: (I3 -I2) Zd +I3 Ze+ E = 0 ⇨-I2 Zd+I3 (Ze +Zd) = E ---- (3)
The equations 1, 2, 3 are the loop equations which are to be solved for the loop currents.
Choice of independent voltages:
In analyzing the network on voltage basis, we have to determine the number of independent
branch voltages. We can use graph theory concepts to determine independent voltages.
Consider the tree of a network graph which is connected sub graph with no closed paths. Since
it is connected sub graph, there exists a unique path between every pair of nodes only, through
tree branches removal of tree branch voltages results in the equal potential of all nodes. Hence
of all the tree branch voltages are set equal to zero, where in all the branch voltages of the
Network will automatically become zero. All the link branch voltages can beexpressed in a
unique
Hence for any given network within n nodes and b branches, there will be (n-1) tree branches
and hence there will be (n-1) independent branch voltages. The remaining branches voltages
can be expressed in terms of these independent branch voltages. To determine these
independent branch voltages, we formulate the (n-1) equations by applying KCL to each of the
nodes and these equations are nodal equations. This method of analysis is called nodal method
of analysis and is based on KCL.
Toillustrate,weconsiderthebelowexample.Ifthebranchvoltagesarer1, r2,––––––,r8then
theycanbeexpressedintermsoftreebranchvoltages[r5,r6,r7,r8]as
[v] = [B] [rb]
143
Where [v] = column branch voltages; [rb] = column of tree branch voltages;
[B] = basic cut set matrix
From that graph we can get,
The link branch voltages are expressed in a unique way as

r1= r5 + r6 r2= —r6 + r7 r3= —r7 + r8
r4= —r5 + r8
The nodal equations are formulated using columns of above equations.
8. Wright short notes on terms related to network topology?
Solution:
Network Topology:
An electric circuit is an interconnection of active and passive elements. Network also a same
thing but not a closed path, also a complex circuit which has large number of elements
preferred.
For analyzing a network, we need a systematic procedure for formulating the network
equilibrium equations and solving these equations to determine the current through and
voltage across each element of a network. For that purpose we are using KCL and KVL.
144
Here the problem is to determine the number of independent loop currents or node pair
voltages which are to be determined for a given network from the network equations. For that
purpose we are using a systematic procedure from the geometry of a network known as
network topology.
Topology: Topology is a branch of geometry applicable to electrical circuits where even by
bending, twisting, swapping, stretching and also circuit make up and down will not disturb its
circuit property known as topology.
Ex:
Graph:
Graph is a skeleton representation of a circuit or network, where every element is suppressed
by its nature and represented as a simple straight line.
➢ Ideal voltage sources are short circuits.
➢ Ideal current sources are open circuits.
➢ In graph theory nodes are numbered like 1, 2, 3, 4, -----
➢ Branches named like a, b, c, d, ------
➢ In graph theory, .i.e. li = b- (n-1)
Where li= independent loops, n= nodes, b= branch
Ex:
Node or Vertex: It is the junction of two or more elements in a network. Each node or
145
junction in a network is called a vertex in a graph.
Path (P):Path is a traversed from one node to another node with crossing the same node twice.
Ex:noofpossiblepathsfrom1to3 5
P1 1 35
P2 1 23
P3 1 43
P4 1 2 4 3
P5 1 4 2 3
m1 1 2 4 1
m2 1 3 2 1
m3 2 3 4 2
Individual loop (li) = 3 + 4 =7

nodes (n) = 4 branches (b) = 6
mesh(m)=3
Tree: A tree is a sub graph which connects all the nodes without forming closed loops.
➢ Any tree of a particular graph will have only (n-1) edges.
➢ A tree with ‘n’ nodes has a rank of (n-1)
nn–2 , n > 2 complete graph
➢ No of trees {
|[Ar] [Ar]|t ‹ any graph
Where [Ar] reduced incidence matrix.
Twig: The branch of tree specifically called as twig and also indicated by “thick line”. Any
tree will have (n-1) twigs.
Co Tree: The set of branches other than tree branches together form a co tree.
Link: The branches of co tree are called as links, indicated by dotted lines. Any co tree of a
146
particular graph will have only b – (n-1) links.
EX:
From that, graph = tree + co tree
Branches = twigs + links b = (n-1) + b-(n-1)

Ex: the number of possible trees for the graph below and also draw thetrees?
No of trees, nn–2 = 42 =16
UNIT-II
1. Explain star and delta connections of three phase system?
Solution:
In three phase circuit, connections can be given in two types:
i) Star connection
ii) Delta connection
Star Connection:
In star connection, there is four wire, three wires are phase wire and fourth is neutral which is
taken from the star point. Star connection is preferred for long distance power
transmission because it is having the neutral point. In this we need to come to the concept of
balanced and unbalanced current in power system.
When equal current will flow through all the three phases, then it is called as balanced current.
And when the current will not be equal in any of the phase, then it is unbalanced current. In this
case, during balanced condition there will be no current flowing through the neutral line and
hence there is no use of the neutral terminal. But when there will be unbalanced current flowing
147
in the three phase circuit, neutral is having a vital role. It will take the unbalanced current
through to the ground and protect the transformer. Unbalanced current affects transformer and it
may also cause damage to the transformer and for this star connection is preferred for long
distance transmission. The star connection is shown below-
In star connection, the line voltage is √3 times of phase voltage. Line voltage is
the voltage between two phases in three phase circuit and phase voltage is the voltage between
one phase to the neutral line. And the current is same for both line and phase. It is shown as
expression below
Delta Connection:
In delta connection, there is three wires alone and no neutral terminal is taken. Normally delta
connection is preferred for short distance due to the problem of unbalanced current in the circuit.
The figure is shown below for delta connection.
In the load station, ground can be used as neutral path if required. In delta connection, the line
voltage is same with that of phase voltage. And the line current is √3 times of phase current. It is
shown as expression below,
Three-phase voltages are often produced with a three-phase ac generator (or alternator) whose
cross-sectional view is shown in Fig. The generator basically consists of a rotating magnet
(called the rotor) surrounded by a stationary winding (called the stator). Three separate windings
or coils with terminals a-a’, b-b’, and c-c’are physically placed 120◦ apart around the stator.
Terminals a and a’, for example, stand for one of the ends of coils going into and the other end
coming out of the page. As the rotor rotates, its magnetic field “cuts” the flux from the three coils
and induces voltages in the coils. Because the coils are placed 120◦ apart, the induced voltages in
the coils are equal in magnitude but out of phase by 120◦ (Fig. 12.5). Since each coil can be
regarded as a single-phase generator by itself, the three-phase generator can supply power to
both single-phase and three-phase loads.
148
A typical three-phase system consists of three voltage sources connected to loads by three or four
wires (or transmission lines). (Three phase current sources are very scarce.) A three-phase
system is equivalent to three single-phase circuits. The voltage sources can be either wye-
connected as shown in Fig. (a) or delta-connected as in Fig. (b).
Let us consider the wye-connected voltages in Fig. (a) for now.
The voltages Van, Vbn, and Vcn are respectively between lines a, b, and c, and the neutral line n.
These voltages are called phase voltages. If the voltage sources have the same amplitude and
frequency ω and are out of phase with each other by 120◦, the voltages are said to be balanced.
This implies that
Van + Vbn + Vcn = 0
|Van| = |Vbn| = |Vcn|
Thus, Balanced phase voltages are equal in magnitude and are out of phase with each other by
120◦. Since the three-phase voltages are 120◦ out of phase with each other, there are two
possible combinations. One possibility is shown in Fig. (a) and expressed mathematically as
Van=Vp0◦
Vbn=Vp −120◦
Vcn=Vp−240◦ =Vp+120◦
where Vp is the effective or rms value. This is known as the abc sequence or positive sequence.
In this phase sequence, Van leads Vbn, which in turn leads Vcn. This sequence is produced when
149
the rotor in Fig. rotates counterclockwise. The other possibility is shown in Fig. (b)and is given
by
The phase sequence is the time order in which the voltages pass through their respective
maximum values.
This is called the acb sequence or negative sequence. For this phase sequence, Van leads Vcn,
which in turn leads Vbn. The acb sequence is produced when the rotor in Fig. rotates in the
clockwise direction.
Like the generator connections, a three-phase load can be either wye-connected or delta-
connected, depending on the end application. Fig. (a) shows a wye-connected load, and Fig. (b)
shows a delta-connected load. The neutral line in Fig.(a) may or may not be there, depending on
whether the system is four- or three-wire. A wye- or delta-connected load is said to be
unbalanced if the phase impedances are not equal in magnitude or phase.
Two possible three phase load configurations:

(a) a Y-connected load,
(b) a Delta-connected load
150
A balanced load is one in which the phase impedances are equal in magnitude and in phase. For
a balanced wye-connected load,
Z1= Z2 = Z3= ZY
Where ZY is the load impedance per phase. For a balanced delta-connected load,
Za = Zb = Zc = Z
where Z is the load impedance per phase in this case. We recall from Eq. that
Z= 3ZY or ZY= (1/3)Z
So we know that a wye-connected load can be transformed into a delta connected load, or vice
versa, using Eq. Since both the three-phase source and the three-phase load can be either wye- or
delta-connected, we have four possible connections: Y-Y connection (i.e., Y-connected source
with a Y-connected load).
• Y-connection.
• - connection.
•-Y connection.
It is appropriate to mention here that a balanced delta-connected load is more common than a
balanced wye-connected load. This is due to the ease with which loads may be added or removed
from each phase of a delta-connected load. This is very difficult with a wye-connected load
because the neutral may not be accessible. On the other hand, delta connected sources are not
common in practice because of the circulating current that will result in the delta-mesh if the
three-phase voltages are slightly unbalanced.
2. Deriving relation between line and phase voltages and currents in a star connection
and expression for power- (40 min)
Solution:
To derive the relations between line and phase currents and voltages of a star connected system,
we have first to draw a balanced star connected system.
151
Suppose due to load impedance the current lags the applied voltage in each phase of the system
by an angle ϕ. As we have considered that the system is perfectly balanced, the magnitude of
current and voltage of each phase is the same. Let us say, the magnitude of the voltage across the
red phase i.e. magnitude of the voltage between neutral point (N) and red phase terminal (R) is
VR.
Similarly, the magnitude of the voltage across yellow phase is VY and the magnitude of the
voltage across blue phase is VB. In the balanced star system, magnitude of phase voltage in each
phase is Vph.
∴ VR = VY = VB = Vph
We know in the star connection, line current is same as phase current. The magnitude of
this current is same in all three phases and say it is IL.
∴ IR = IY = IB = IL, Where, IR is line current of R phase, IY is line current of Y phase and IB is line
current of B phase. Again, phase current, Iph of each phase is same as line current IL in star
connected system.
∴ IR = IY = IB = IL = Iph.
Now, let us say, the voltage across R and Y terminal of the star connected circuit is VRY.
The voltage across Y and B terminal of the star connected circuit is VYB The voltage across B
and R terminal of the star connected circuit is VBR.
From the diagram, it is found that
VRY = VR + (− VY)
152
Similarly, VYB = VY + (− VB)
And, VBR = VB + (− VR)
Now, as angle between VR and VY is 120o(electrical),

the angle between VR and – VY is 180o – 120o = 60o(electrical).
Thus, for the star-connected system line voltage = √3 × phase voltage.

Line current = Phase current
As, the angle between voltage and current per phase is φ, the electric power per phase is
So the total power of three phase system is
3. Deriving relation between line and phase voltages and currents in delta or mesh
connection?
Solution:
In Delta (Δ) or Mesh connection, the finished terminal of one winding is connected to start
terminal of the other phase and so on which gives a closed circuit. The three line conductors are
run from the three junctions of the mesh called Line Conductors. The connection in Delta form is
shown in the figure below.
153
To obtain the Delta connections, a2 is connected with b1, b2 is connected with c1 and c2 is
connected with a1 as shown in the above figure. The three conductors R, Y and B are running
from the three junctions known as Line Conductors.
The current flowing through each phase is called Phase Current (Iph), and the current flowing
through each line conductor is called Line Current (IL).
The voltage across each phase is called Phase Voltage (Eph), and the voltage across two line
conductors is called Line Voltage (EL).
Relation Between Phase Voltage and Line Voltage in Delta Connection
To understand the relationship between the phase voltage and line voltage in the Delta consider
the figure A shown below.
t is clear from the figure that the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 is the same as across the
terminals R and Y. Therefore,
154
Similarly,
Delta Connection in a 3 Phase System
155
Relation between Phase Voltage and Line Voltage in Delta Connection
It is clear from the figure that the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 is the same as across the
Similarly,
Where, the phase voltages are
The line voltages are
156
Hence, in Delta Connection Line Voltage is equal to Phase Voltage.
Relation between Phase Current and Line Current in Delta Connection
As in the balanced system the three phase current I12, I23 and I31 are equal in magnitude but are
displaced from one another by 120 degrees electrical.
The phasor diagram is shown below.
Hence,
If we look at figure A, it is seen that the current is divided at every junction 1, 2 and 3.
Applying Kirchhoff’s Law at junction 1
The Incoming currents are equal to outgoing currents.
And their vector difference will be given as
The vector I12 is reversed and is added in the vector I31 to get the vector sum of I31 and –I12 as
shown above in the phasor diagram. Therefore,
157
As we know, IR = IL, therefore,
Similarly,
Hence, in Delta connection line current is root three times of phase current.
4. Wright short notes on analysis of balanced and unbalanced 3 phase

circuits?
Solution:
Requirements of a Balanced 3-Phase Set
Following are the requirements that must be satisfied in order for a set of 3 sinusoidal variables
(usually voltages or currents) to be a "balanced 3-phase set"
All 3 variables have the same amplitude.
All 3 variables have the same frequency.
All 3 variables are 120o in phase.
In terms of the time domain, a set of balance 3-phase voltages has the following general form.
Va= Vmcos ( t+ )
Vb= Vmcos( t+ -120o)
158
Vc= Vmcos( t+ -240o)= Vmcos( t+ +120o)
Notice that we have assumed (and will continue to assume) positive (abc) phase sequence, i.e.,
phase "b" follows 120o behind "a" & phase "c" follows 120o behind phase "b"
Figure below illustrates the balanced 3-phase voltages in time domain.
Figure: Balanced 3-Phase Variables in Time Domain
In terms of phasors, we write the same balanced set as follows. Note that the phasors are in
rms.
Va=Vm ˚
Vb=Vm -120o
Vc=Vm -240o=Vm +120o
Thus,
Vb=Va -120o, and Vc=Va +120o
Figure below illustrates the balanced 3-phase phasor graphically.
Figure: Balanced 3-Phase Phasors

Requirements of a Balanced 3-Phase Circuit
Following are the requirements that must be satisfied in order for a 3-phase system or circuit to
be balanced
All 3 sources are represented by a set of balanced 3-phase variables
All loads are 3-phase with equal impedances
Line impedances are equal in all 3 phases
Having a balanced circuit allows for simplified analysis of the 3-phase circuit. In fact, if the
circuit is balanced, we can solve for the voltages, currents, and powers, etc. in one phase using
159
circuit analysis. The values of the corresponding variables in the other two phases can be found
using some basic equations. This type of solution is accomplished using a "one-line diagram",
which will be discussed later. If the circuit is not balanced, all three phases should be analyzed
in detail.
Figure below illustrates a balanced 3-phase circuit and some of the naming conventions to be
used in this course
Figure: A Balanced 3-Phase Circuit
Unbalanced three-phase systems:

This chapter would be incomplete without mentioning unbalanced three phase systems. An
unbalanced system is caused by two possible situations: (1) the source voltages are not equal in
magnitude and/or differ in phase by angles that are unequal, or (2) load impedances are unequal.
Thus,
An unbalanced systemis due to unbalanced voltage sources or an unbalanced load.
To simplify analysis, we will assume balanced source voltages, but an unbalanced load.
Unbalanced three-phase systems are solved by direct application of mesh and nodal analysis.
Figure shows an example of an unbalanced three-phase system that consists of balanced source
voltages (notshown in the figure) and an unbalanced Y-connected load (shown in the figure).
Since the load is unbalanced, ZA, ZB, and ZC are not equal. The line currents are determined by
Ohm’s law asIa=VAN/ZA, Ib=VBN/ZB, Ic=VCN/ZC
This set of unbalanced line currents produces current in the neutral line, which is not zero as in a
balanced system. Applying KCL at node N gives the neutral line current as In=−(Ia+Ib+Ic)
In a three-wire system where the neutral line is absent, we can still find the line currents Ia, Ib,
and Icusing mesh analysis. At node N, KCL must be satisfied so that Ia+Ib+Ic= 0 in this case. The
160
same could be done for a -Y, Y-, or -three-wire system. As mentioned earlier, in long
distance power transmission, conductors in multiples of three (multiple three-wire systems) are
used, with the earth itself acting as the neutral conductor.
To calculate power in an unbalanced three-phase system requires that we find the power in each
phase using above Equations. The total power is not simply three times the power in one phase
but the sum of the powers in the three phases.
5. Discuss the different methods to measure the 3 phase active and power?
Solution:
3-Phase Power:
The 3-phase (3 ) power of a circuit is simply the sum of the power in the three individual phases.
Thus for a Wye circuit, the equation is
S3 = Sa + Sb + Sc
and for a Delta circuit, the equation is
S3 = Sab + Sbc + Sca
Another advantage of having a balanced circuit is that each phase has the same power.
That is,
S = Sab = Sbc = Sca = Sa = Sb = Sc
so that,
S3 = 3 S = 3 Sab = 3 Sa
Just in case you didn't know, right now you should be thinking "This is very cool!"
The single phase power can be found using either
S = Va Ia* or S = Vab Iab*
We can do some interesting rearrangements to get the power in terms of the line voltage (Vab)
and line current (Ia) only.
S = Va Ia* = |Va| | Ia|* = {|Vab| / }| Ia| =S

Thus, S3 = 3 S
Note:
In balanced systems, all the S 's and S3 have the same power factor (pf) and thus the same
power factor angle = impedance angle. .
If Xa, Xb, and Xc are a balanced set,

Xb = Xa (1 -120o) , and
Xc = Xa (1 +120o)
In general,
S3 = Sa + Sb + Sc
For a balanced system,
S3 = 3 S
S = Va Ia*
S = Vab Iab*
161
For the balanced and positive sequence case,
Vab = Va 30o
Ia = IAB -30o
Various methods are used measurement of three phase power in three phase circuits on the basis
of number of wattmeter used.
We have three methods:
1. Measurement of Three Phase Power by Three Wattmeters Method
The circuit diagram is shown below-
Here, it is applied to three phase four wire systems, current coil of all the three wattmeters
marked as one, two and three are connected to respective phases marked as one, two and three.
Pressure coils of all the three wattmeter are connected to common point at neutral line. Clearly
each wattmeter will give reading as product of phase current and line voltage which is phase
power. The resultant sum of all the readings of wattmeter will give the total power of the circuit.
Mathematically we can
2. Measurement of Three Phase Power by Two Wattmeters Method
In this method we have two types of connections: Star connection of loads and
Delta connection of loads.
When the star connected load, the diagram is shown in below-
162
For star connected load clearly the reading of wattmeter one is product phase current and voltage
difference (V2-V3). Similarly the reading of wattmeter two is the product of phase current and
the voltage difference (V2-V3). Thus the total power of the circuit is sum of the reading of both
the wattmeters.
Mathematically we can write
but we have ,
Hence putting the value of .
We get total power as .
When delta connected load, the diagram is shown in below
The reading of wattmeter one can be written as

and
reading of wattmeter two is
But
,
Hence expression for total power will reduce to
.
3. Measurement of Three Phase Power by One Wattmeter Method

Limitation of this method is that it cannot be applied on unbalanced load. So under this condition
we have
.
Diagram is shown below:
163
Two switches are given which are marked as 1-3 and 1-2, by closing the switch 1-3 we get
reading of wattmeter as
Similarly the reading of wattmeter when switch 1-2 is closed is
6. If Vab = 400 V in a balanced Y-connected three-phase generator, find the phase

voltages, assuming the phase sequence is: (a) abc (b) acb
Solution:
164
7. A balanced Y-Y four-wire system has phase voltages Van=120∠00,
Vbn=120∠−120°Vcn=120∠1200. The load impedance per phase is 19 + j13 Ω, and the line
impedance per phase is 1+ j2Ω. Solve for the line currents and neutral current?
Solution:
8. For the balanced circuit in Fig., Vab =125∠0°V. Find the line currents IaA, IbB and
IcC?
165
Solution:
166
UNIT-III
1. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L series circuit for dc excitation?
Solution:
DC Response of an R-L Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of a resistance and inductance as shown in fig. the inductor in the
circuit is initially uncharged and is in series with the resistor. When switch S is closed, we can
find the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s law to the circuit results in
following differential equations.
In the above equation, the current i is the solution to be found and V is the applied constant
voltage. The voltage V is applied to the circuit only when the switch S is closed. The above
equation is linear differential equation of the first order comparing with the non homogenous
differential equation
Where c is an arbitrary constant,

in similar way we can write the current equation as
To determine the value of ‘c’, in equation (5) we use initial conditions. In the circuit shown in fig
the switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0–, i.e. just before closing the switch S, the current in the
inductor is zero. Since the inductor does not allow sudden changes in currents, at t=0+ just after
the switch is closed, the current remains zero.
167
Substituting above conditions we get,
0 = c +(V/R)
Therefore, c = -V/R
Hence from equation
Above equation consists of two parts, the steady state part (V/R) and other is transient part.
After 5, the transient part reaches more than 99 percent of its final value. In fig we can find out
the voltages and powers across each element by using the current.
168
2. Derive the expression for transient response of R-C series circuit for dc excitation?
Solution:
DC Response of an R-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and capacitance as shown in fig. the capacitor in the
circuit is initially uncharged, and is in series with resistor. When the switch S is closed at t=0, we
can determine the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can
determine the differential equations.
169
By differentiating the above equation we get,
Equation is linear differential equation with only the complementary function. The particular
solution for the above equation is zero. The solution for this type of differential equation is
Here, to find the value of c, we use the initial conditions. In the circuit shown in fig switch S is
closed at t=0. Since the capacitor never allows sudden changes in voltage, it will act as short at
t=0+. So, the current in the circuit at t=0+ is V/R.
Substituting the i value in equation we get,
When switch S is closed, the response decays with time as shown in fig. In the solution, the
quantity RC is the time constant, and is denoted by r, where r= RC seconds.
the voltage across each element by using the current equation.
Voltage across the resistor
Similarly, voltage across the capacitor
170
At t=0, voltage across the capacitor is zero.
Power in the resistor,
Power in the capacitor,
The responses are shown in fig.
3. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L-C series circuit for dc
excitation?
Solution:
171
DC Response of an R-L-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance, inductance and capacitance as shown in fig. the
capacitor and inductor are initially uncharged, and are in series with a resistor. When the switch
S is closed at t=0, we can determine the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s
laws we can determine the differential equations.
By differentiating above equation we get,
The above equation is a second order linear differential equation, with only complementary
function. The particular solution for the above equation is zero. Characteristic equation for the
above differential equation is
The roots above equation are,
By assuming,
Here K2 may be positive or negative or zero.

172
K2 is positive,
The roots are real and unequal, and give the over damped response as shown in fig. then equation
(4) becomes
The solution for the above equation is,
The current curve for the over damped case is shown in fig.
K Is negative,
The roots are complex conjugate, and give the under damped response as shown in fig. the
equation as shown in becomes
The solution for above equation is,
The current curve for the under damped case is shown in fig.
173
K Is zero,
When
The roots are equal, and give the critically damped response as shown the equation becomes
The solution for above equation is
The current curve for critically damped case is as shown in fig.
174
K Is negative,
K Is zero,
When
175
4. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L series circuit for ac excitation?
Solution:
Sinusoidal Response of R-L Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and inductance are connected as shown in fig. the
switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0, sinusoidal voltage Vcos(wt + 8) applied to RL circuit, where V
is the amplitude of the wave and 8 is the phase angle. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can
The corresponding characteristic equation is
For the above equation, the solution consists of two parts. One is complementary
function and other is particular integral.
176
The complementary function of the solution is
The particular solution can be obtained by using undetermined co-efficient.

By assuming,
Substituting equations 5 & 6 in 3 we get,
Comparing cosine terms and sine terms, we get
From the above equations we have
Substituting the A and B values in equation (5) we get
177
To find M and Ø, we divide one equation by the other
Squaring both equations and adding, we get
The particular current becomes
The complete solution for the current, i = ic + ip
Since the inductor does not allow sudden changes in currents, at t=0, i=0
The complete solution for the current is,
5. Derive the expression for transient response of R-C series circuit for ac excitation?
Solution:
178
Sinusoidal Response of R-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and capacitance in series as shown

in fig. the switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0, sinusoidal voltage Vcos(wt + 8)
applied to RL circuit, where V is the amplitude of the wave and 8 is the phase
angle. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can determine the differential
equations.
The complementary function,
The particular solution can be obtained by using undetermined coefficients.
179
Substituting equation 4 & 5 in 3 we get
Comparing both sides,
So we get,
Substituting A and B values in 4 we get
180
Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltages,
181
Therefore,
6. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L-C series circuit for ac
excitation?
Solution:
Sinusoidal Response of R-L-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance, inductance and capacitance in series as shown in fig.
Switch s is closed at t=0. At t=0, a sinusoidal voltage Vcos(wt + 8) applied to RLC circuit, where
V is the amplitude of the wave and 8 is the phase angle. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can
182
ip = A cos(wt + 8) + B sin(wt + 8) ---------- (5)
ip1 = -Aw sin(wt + 8) + Bw cos(wt + 8) -------- (6)
ip11 = -Aw2 cos(wt + 8) - Bw2 sin(wt + 8) ---------- (7)
Substituting 5,6 & 7 in equation 4 we get,
Comparing both the sides, sine and cosine coefficients we get,
183
Substituting A and B values in 5 weget
184
The complementary function is similar to that of DC series RLC circuit.
By assuming,

K2 Is positive, when
The roots are real and unequal, and give the over damped response as shown in fig.
then equation (4) becomes
185
Therefore the complete solution is, i = ic + ip
K2 Is negative, when
The roots are complex conjugate, and give the under damped the equation as shown in
becomes
K2 Is zero, when
The roots are equal, and give the critically damped response as shown
in fig. the equation becomes

186
7. Obtain the step response of R-L and R-C series circuits for dc excitation?
Solution:
Using the Laplace transform as part of your circuit analysis provides you with a prediction of
circuit response. Analyze the poles of the Laplace transform to get a general idea of output
behavior. Real poles, for instance, indicate exponential output behavior.
Follow these basic steps to analyze a circuit using Laplace techniques:
• Develop the differential equation in the time-domain using Kirchhoff’s laws and element
equations.
• Apply the Laplace transformation of the differential equation to put the equation in the s-
domain.
• Algebraically solve for the solution, or response transform.
• Apply the inverse Laplace transformation to produce the solution to the original
differential equation described in the time-domain.
To get comfortable with this process, you simply need to practice applying it to different types of
circuits such as an RC (resistor-capacitor) circuit, an RL (resistor-inductor) circuit, and an RLC
(resistor-inductor-capacitor) circuit.
Here is an RL circuit that has a switch that’s been in Position A for a long time. The switch
moves to Position B at time t = 0.
For this circuit, you have the following KVL equation:

vR(t) + vL(t) = 0
Next, formulate the element equation (or i-v characteristic) for each device. Using Ohm’s law to
describe the voltage across the resistor, you have the following relationship:
vR(t) = iL(t)R
The inductor’s element equation is
187
Substituting the element equations, vR(t) and vL(t), into the KVL equation gives you the desired
first-order differential equation:
On to Step 2: Apply the Laplace transform to the differential equation:
The preceding equation uses the linearity property which says you can take the Laplace
transform of each term. For the first term on the left side of the equation, you use the
differentiation property:
This equation uses IL(s) = ℒ[iL(t)], and I0 is the initial current flowing through the inductor.
The Laplace transform of the differential equation becomes
IL(s)R + L[sIL(s) – I0] = 0
Solve for IL(s):
For a given initial condition, this equation provides the solution iL(t) to the original first-order
differential equation. You simply perform an inverse Laplace transform of IL(s) — or look for
the appropriate transform pair in this table — to get back to the time-domain.
188
The preceding equation has an exponential form for the Laplace transform pair. You wind up
with the following solution:
The result shows as time t approaches infinity, the initial inductor current eventually dies out to
zero after a long period of time — about 5 time constants (L/R).
Using the Laplace transform as part of your circuit analysis provides you with a prediction of
circuit response. Analyze the poles of the Laplace transform to get a general idea of output
behavior. Real poles, for instance, indicate exponential output behavior.
Follow these basic steps to analyze a circuit using Laplace techniques:
Develop the differential equation in the time-domain using Kirchhoff’s laws and element
equations.
Apply the Laplace transformation of the differential equation to put the equation in the s-domain.
Algebraically solve for the solution, or response transform.
Apply the inverse Laplace transformation to produce the solution to the original differential
equation described in the time-domain.
To get comfortable with this process, you simply need to practice applying it to different types of
circuits such as an RC (resistor-capacitor) circuit, an RL (resistor-inductor) circuit, and an RLC
(resistor-inductor-capacitor) circuit.
Consider the simple first-order RC series circuit shown here. To set up the differential equation
for this series circuit, you can use Kirchhoff’s voltage law (KVL), which says the sum of the
voltage rises and drops around a loop is zero. This circuit has the following KVL equation
around the loop:
-vS(t) + vr(t) + vc(t) = 0
Next, formulate the element equation (or i-v characteristic) for each device. The element
equation for the source is
vS(t) = VAu(t)
Use Ohm’s law to describe the voltage across the resistor:
vR(t) = i(t)R
The capacitor’s element equation is given as
189
Substituting this expression for i(t) into vR(t) gives you the following expression:
Substituting vR(t), vC(t), and vS(t) into the KVL equation leads to
Now rearrange the equation to get the desired first-order differential equation:
Now you’re ready to apply the Laplace transformation of the differential equation in the s-
domain. The result is
On the left, the linearity property was used to take the Laplace transform of each term. For the
first term on the left side of the equation, you use the differentiation property, which gives you
This equation uses VC(s) = ℒ[vC(t)], and V0 is the initial voltage across the capacitor.
Using the following table, the Laplace transform of a step function provides you with this:
190
Based on the preceding expressions for the Laplace transforms, the differential equation becomes
the following:
Next, rearrange the equation:
Solve for the output Vc(s) to get the following transform solution:
By performing an inverse Laplace transform of VC(s) for a given initial condition, this equation
leads to the solution vC(t) of the original first-order differential equation.
On to Step 3 of the process. To get the time-domain solution vC(t), you need to do a partial
fraction expansion for the first term on the right side of the preceding equation:
You need to determine constants A and B. To simplify the preceding equation, multiply both
sides by s(s + 1/RC) to get rid of the denominators:
Algebraically rearrange the equation by collecting like terms:
191
In order for the left side of the preceding equation to be zero, the coefficients must be zero (A +
B = 0 and A – VA = 0). For constants A and B, you wind up with A = VA and B = –VA.
Substitute these values into the following equation:
The substitution leads you to:
Now substitute the preceding expression into the VC(s) equation to get the transform solution:
That completes the partial fraction expansion. You can then use the table given earlier to find the
inverse Laplace transform for each term on the right side of the preceding equation.
The first term has the form of a step function, and the last two terms have the form of an
exponential, so the inverse Laplace transform of the preceding equation leads you to the
following solution vC(t) in the time-domain:
The result shows as time t approaches infinity, the capacitor charges to the value of the
input VA. Also, the initial voltage of the capacitor eventually dies out to zero after a long period
of time (about 5 time constants, RC).
UNIT-IV
1. Explain the concept of poles, zeros, their significance and necessary conditions for
driving point functions and transfer functions?
Solution:
System Poles and Zeros:

The transfer function provides a basis for determining important system response characteristics
without solving the complete differential equation. As defined, the transfer function is a rational
function in the complex variable s = σ + jω, that is
192
It is often convenient to factor the polynomials in the numerator and denominator, and to write
the transfer function in terms of those factors
Where the numerator and denominator polynomials, N(s) and D(s), have real coefficients defined
by the system’s differential equation and K = bm/an. As written in Eq. (2) the zi’s are the roots
of the equation
N(s) =0
and are defined to be the system zeros, and the pi’s are the roots of the equation
D(s) = 0,
and are defined to be the system poles. In Eq. (2) the factors in the numerator and denominator
are written so that when s = zi the numerator N(s) = 0 and the transfer function vanishes, that is
and similarly when s = pi the denominator polynomial D(s) = 0 and the value of the transfer
function becomes unbounded,
All of the coefficients of polynomials N(s) and D(s) are real, therefore the poles and zeros must
be either purely real, or appear in complex conjugate pairs. In general for the poles, either pi=σi,
or else pi, pi+1 = σi+jωi. The existence of a single complex pole without a corresponding
conjugate pole would generate complex coefficients in the polynomial D(s). Similarly, the
system zeros are either real or appear in complex conjugate pairs.
A system is characterized by its poles and zeros in the sense that they allow reconstruction of the
input/output differential equation. In general, the poles and zeros of a transfer function may be
complex, and the system dynamics may be represented graphically by plotting their locations on
the complex s-plane, whose axes represent the real and imaginary parts of the complex variable
193
s. Such plots are known as pole-zero plots. It is usual to mark a zero location by a circle (◦) and a
pole location a cross (×). The location of the poles and zeros provide qualitative insights into the
response characteristics of a system
System Stability: The stability of a linear system may be determined directly from its transfer
function. An nth order linear system is asymptotically stable only if all of the components in the
homogeneous response from a finite set of initial conditions decay to zero as time increases, or
Where the pi are the system poles. In a stable system all components of the homogeneous
response must decay to zero as time increases. If any pole has a positive real part there is a
component in the output that increases without bound, causing the system to be unstable.
In order for a linear system to be stable, all of its poles must have negative real parts that are they
must all lie within the left-half of the s-plane. An unstable pole, lying in the right half of the s-
plane, generates a component in the system homogeneous response that increases without bound
from any finite initial conditions.
A system having one or more poles lying on the imaginary axis of the s-plane has non-decaying
oscillatory components in its homogeneous response, and is defined to be marginally stable.
Properties of Driving Point (Positive Real) Functions:
These conditions are required to satisfy to be positive realness:
➢ Y(s) must be a rational function in s with real coefficients, i.e., the coefficients of
the numerator and denominator polynomials is real and positive.
➢ The poles and zeros of Y(s) have either negative or zero real parts, i.e., Y(s) not have
poles or zeros in the right half s plane.
➢ Poles of Y(s) on the imaginary axis must be simple and their residues must be real and
positive, i.e., Y(s) not has multiple poles or zeros on the jω axis. The same statement
applies to the poles of l/Y(s).
➢ The degrees of the numerator and denominator polynomials in Y(s) differ at most by 1.
Thus the number of finite poles and finite zeros of Y(s) differ at most by 1.
➢ The terms of lowest degree in the numerator and denominator polynomials of

Y(s) differ in degree at most by 1. So Y(s) has neither multiple poles nor zeros at the
origin.
➢ There are no missing terms in numerator and denominator polynomials unless all even or
all odd terms are missing.
2. What is two-port network? Obtain the Z, Y, Hybrid and ABCD parameters?
Solution:
A network containing two pairs of terminals is called as two port network.
194
Normally one pair of terminals coming together to supply power or to withdraw power or to
measure the parameters, are called as port. To achieve simplicity, the whole network is shown
with a single block.
A typical two port network is as shown below in fig (a)
Z-parameters can be defined by the following equations

V1 = Z11I1 + Z12I2 …………………… (1)
V2 = Z21I1 + Z22I2 …………………… (2)
In Matrix form:
If port 2-21is open circuited, i.e., I2 = 0, then Z11 = V1/I1 & Z21 = V2/I1
Here, Z11 is the driving point impedance at port 1-11with 2-21open circuited. It can also be
called as open circuit input impedance.
Z21 is the transfer impedance at port 1-11with 2-21 open circuited. It can also be called as open
circuit forward transfer impedance.
Z12 is the transfer impedance at port 2-21 with 1-11open circuited. It can also be called as open
circuit reverse transfer impedance and
Z22 is the driving point impedance at port 2-21 with 1-11open circuited. It can also be called as
open circuit output impedance.
Network is
a) Reciprocal then V1/I2 (where I1 = 0) = V2/I1 (where I2 = 0) i.e., Z12 = Z21
b) Symmetrical then V1/I1 (where I2 = 0) = V2/I2 (where I1 = 0) i.e., Z11 = Z22
SHORT CIRCUIT ADMITTANCE PARAMETERS (Y-parameters):
Y-parameters can be defined by the following equations

I1 = Y11V1 + Y12V2 ………………. (1)
I2 = Y21V1 + Y22V2 ………………. (2)
In matrix form
195
If port 2-21is short circuited, i.e. V2 = 0 then Y11 = I1/V1 & Y21 = I2/V1
If the network is
a) Reciprocal then I2/V1 (where V2 = 0) = I1/V2 (where V1 = 0) i.e. Y21 = Y12
b) Symmetrical then I1/ V1 (where V2 = 0) = I2/ V2 (where V1 = 0) i.e. Y11 = Y22
Hybrid Parameters (h-Parameters):
h-parameters can be defined by the following equations
In matrix form:
If port 2-21is short circuited, i.e. V2 = 0 then
h11 is called input impedance and h21 is called forward current gain.
If port 1-11is open circuited, i.e., I1=0 then
h22 is called output admittance and h12 is called reverse voltage gain.
ABCD Parameters:
ABCD parameters can be defined by the following equations
196
In matrix form
If port 2-21is open circuited i.e., I2=0 then
A is called reverse voltage ratio and C is known as transfer admittance.

If port 2-21is short circuited i.e., V2=0 then
B is called transfer impedance and D is called reverse current ratio.
3. Briefly discuss about network functions and network parameters?
Solution:
A network function is the Laplace transform of an impulse response. Its format is a ratio of two
polynomials of the complex frequencies. Consider the general two-port network shown in Figure
a. The terminal voltages and currents of the two-port can be related by two classes of network
functions, namely, the driving point functions and the transfer functions.
197
The driving point functions relate the voltage at a port to the current at the same port. Thus,
these functions are a property of a single port. For the input port the driving point impedance
function ZIN(s) is defined as
ZIN(s)=VIN(s)/IIN(s)
This function can be measured by observing the current IIN when the input port is driven by a
voltage source VIN. The driving point admittance function YIN(s) is the reciprocal of the
impedance function, and is given by
The output port driving point functions are denned in a similar way. The transfer
functions of the two-port relate the voltage (or current) at one port to the voltage (or
current) at the other port. The possible forms of transfer functions are:
1. The voltage transfer function, which is a ratio of one voltage to another voltage.
2. The current transfer function, which is a ratio of one current to another current.
3. The transfer impedance function, which is the ratio of a voltage to a current.
4. The transfer admittance function, which is the ratio of a current to a voltage.
The voltage transfer functions are defined with the output port an open circuit, as:
To evaluate the voltage gain, for example, the output voltage VO is measured with the input port
driven by a voltage source VIN. The other three types of transfer functions can be defined in a
similar manner. Of the four types of transfer functions, the voltage transfer function is the one
most often specified in the design of filters
The functions defined above, when realized using resistors, inductors, capacitors, and
active devices, can be shown to be the ratios of polynomials in s with real coefficients. This is
so because the network functions are obtained by solving simple algebraic node equations, which
involve at most the terms R, sL, sC and their reciprocals. The active device, if one exists, the
solution still involves only the addition and multiplication of simple terms, which can only lead
to a ratio of polynomials in s. In addition, all the coefficients of the numerator and denominator
polynomials will be real.
Thus, the general form of a network function is
198
and all the coefficients ai and bi are real. If the numerator and denominator polynomials are
factored, an alternate form of H(s) is obtained:
Where z1, z2, ..., zn are called the zeros of H(s), because H(s) = 0 when s = zi. The roots of
the denominator pl, p2, ..., pm are called the poles of H(s). It can be seen that H(s) = ∞ at
the poles, s = pi.
The poles and zeros can be plotted on the complex s plane (s = σ + jω), which has the real
part σ for the abscissa, and the imaginary part jω for the ordinate.
Properties of all Network Functions:
A consequence of this property is that complex poles (and zeros) must occur in conjugate
pairs. To demonstrate this fact consider a complex root at (s=-a–jb) which leads to the factor
(s+a+jb) in the network function. The jb term will make some of the coefficients complex in
the polynomial, unless the conjugate of the complex root at (s=-a+jb) is also present in the
polynomial. The product of a complex factor and its conjugate is which can be seen
to have real coefficients.
199
Further important properties of network functions are obtained by restricting the networks to
be stable, by which we mean that a bounded input excitation to the network must yield a
bounded response. Put differently, the output of a stable network cannot be made to increase
indefinitely by the application of a bounded input excitation. Passive networks are stable by
their very nature, since they do not contain energy sources that might inject additional energy
into the network. Active networks, however, do contain energy sources that could join
forces with the input excitation to make the output increase indefinitely. Such
unstable networks, however, have no use in the world of practical filters and are therefore
precluded from all our future discussions .
5. Explain the concept of two port network functions using transformed variables?
Solution:
• Consider a two port network with voltages and currents at ports 1-1’ and 2-2’ as V1(t),
I1(t) and V2(t), I2(t) respectively as shown in figure .
Network functions for Two-Port Network are as follows:

1. Driving point functions:
• Driving point impedance functions
• Driving point admittance functions
2. Transfer Functions:
• Voltage transfer functions
• Current transfer functions
• Transfer impedance functions
• Transfer admittance functions
Driving point impedance functions:

200
• The ratio of Laplace transform of voltage and current at port 1-1’ or 2-2’ is defined as driving
point impedance function.
• Thus there are two driving point impedance functions.
• At port 1-1’ denoted as Z11(s): Z11(s)= V1(s)/I1(s)
➢ At port 2-2’ denoted as Z22(s): Z22(s)= V2(s)/ I2(s)
Driving point admittance functions:

• The ratio of Laplace transform of current and voltage at port 1-1’ or 2-2’ is defined as
driving point admittance function.
Thus there are two driving point admittance functions.

• At port 1-1’ denoted as Y11(s)
Y11(s)=I1(s)/V1(s)
Y22(s)=I2(s)/V2(s)
Transfer Functions:
Voltage Transfer Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of voltage at one port and voltage at another
port. It is denoted as G(s).
G12(s) =V1(s)/V2(s) and G21(s) =V2(s)/V1(s)

Current Transfer Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of current at one port and current at another
port. It is denoted as (s).
12(s) = I1(s)/I2(s) and 21(s) =I2(s)/I1(s)

Transfer Impedance Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of voltage at one port and current at another
port.
Z12(s)=V1(s)/I2(s) and Z21(s)=V2(s)/I1(s)

Transfer Admittance Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of current at one port and voltage at another
port.
Y12(s) =I1(s)/V2(s) and Y21(s) =I2(s)/V1(s)
UNIT-V
1. Wright short notes on filters?
Solution:
201
The concept of filters has been an integral part of the evolution of electrical engineering from the
beginning.
A filter is a circuit that is designed to pass signals with desired frequencies and reject or attenuate
others.
As a frequency-selective device, a filter can be used to limit the frequency spectrum of a signal
to some specified band of frequencies. Filters are the
Circuits used in radio and TV receivers to allow us to select one desired signal out of a multitude
of broadcast signals in the environment. A filter is a passive filter if it consists of only passive
elements R, L, and C. It is said to be an active filter if it consists of active elements (such as
transistors and op amps) in addition to passive elements R, L, and C. There are other kinds of
filters—such as digital filters, electromechanical filters, and microwave filters—which are
beyond the level of the text. As shown in Fig. , there are four types of filters whether passive or
active:
1. A low pass filter passes low frequencies and stops high frequencies, as shown ideally in Fig.
(a).
2. A high pass filter passes high frequencies and rejects low frequencies, as shown ideally in Fig.
(b).
3. A band pass filter passes frequencies within a frequency band and blocks or attenuates
frequencies outside the band, as shown ideally in Fig. (c).
4. A band stop filter passes frequencies outside a frequency band and blocks or attenuates
frequencies within the band, as shown ideally in Fig. (d).
2. Discuss the following terms?

a) Low pass filter
b) High pass filter
Solution:
Low pass Filter:
A typical low pass filter is formed when the output of an RC circuit is taken off the capacitor as
shown in Fig... The transfer function is
202
Note that H (0) = 1, H (∞) = 0. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|, along with the ideal
characteristic. The half-power frequency, which is equivalent to the corner frequency on the
Bode plots but in the context of filters is usually known as the cutoff frequency ωc, is obtained
by setting the magnitude of H(ω) equal to 1/√2, thus
203
The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the transfer function H drops in magnitude to
70.71% of its maximum value. It is also regarded as the frequency at which the power dissipated
in a circuit is half of its maximum value.
The cut-off frequency is also called the roll off frequency.
A low pass filter is designed to pass only frequencies from dc up to the cutoff frequency ωc.
A low pass filter can also be formed when the output of an RL circuit is taken off the resistor. Of
course, there are many other circuits for low pass filters.
High pass Filter:

A high pass filter is formed when the output of an RC circuit is taken off the resistor as shown in
Fig. The transfer function is
Note that H (0) = 0, H (∞) = 1. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|. Again, the corner or cutoff
frequency is
204
A high pass filter is designed to pass all frequencies above its cutoff frequency ωc.
A high pass filter can also be formed when the output of an RL circuit is taken off the inductor.
3. Explain about band pass and band reject filters?
Solution:
Band pass Filter:
The RLC series resonant circuit provides a band pass filter when the output is taken off the
resistor as shown in Fig. The transfer function is
205
We observe that H (0) = 0, H (∞) = 0. Figure 14.36 shows the plot of |H (ω)|. The band pass filter
passes a band of frequencies (ω1 < ω < ω2) centered on ω0, the center frequency, which is given
by
A band pass filter is designed to pass all frequencies within a band of frequencies, ω1 < ω < ω2.
Since the band pass filter in Fig is a series resonant circuit, the half power frequencies, the
bandwidth, and the quality factor are determined as in Section. A band pass filter can also be
formed by cascading the low pass filter (where ω2 = ωc) with the high pass filter (where ω1 =
ωc).
Band stop Filter:
Filter that prevents a band of frequencies between two designated values (ω1 and ω2) from
passing is variably known as a band stop, band reject, or notch filter. A band stop filter is formed
when the output RLC series resonant circuit is taken off the LC series combination as shown in
206
Notice that H (0) = 1, H(∞) = 1. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|. Again, the center frequency is
given by
While the half-power frequencies, the bandwidth, and the quality factor is calculated using the
formulas in Section for a series resonant circuit. Here, ω0 is called the frequency of rejection,
while the corresponding bandwidth (B = ω2 −ω1) is known as the bandwidth of rejection. Thus,
A band stop filter is designed to stop or eliminate all frequencies within a band of frequencies,
ω1 < ω < ω2.
4. What is constant K filter?

Solution:
In constant k filters, z1 and z2 are opposite type of reactances.
207
z1z2 = k2
Where k is a constant independent of frequency.

There are two types of constant k type filters:
(i) constant k low pass filter
(ii) constant k high pass filter
Figure shows constant k low pass filter.
Let
Determination of pass band and stop band:

(i) when
208
(ii) when
The passband starts at f = 0 and continues up to fC, the cutoff frequency. All the frequencies
above.
209
Cut off frequency fC are in the attenuation or stop band. Thus, the network is called a low-pass
filter.
We also know that in the pass band
In the attenuation band,
210
The variation of a and b is plotted in the Fig.
The attenuation is zero throughout the pass band but increases gradually from the cutoff
frequency. The phase shift b is zero at zero frequency and increases gradually through the pass
band, reaches p at cutoff frequency fC. It remains at p for all frequencies beyond fC.
Determination of characteristic impedance:
The characteristic impedance of low pass filter will be given by
211
The plots of characteristic impedance are shown in Fig.
z0T is real when f < fC i.e. in the pass band. If f = fC, z0T = 0 and for f > fC, z0T is imaginary in the
attenuation band, rising to infinite reactance at infinite frequency.
z0p is real when f < fC. If f = fC, z0p is finite and for f > fC, z0p is imaginary.
Constant k high pass filter is obtained by changing the positions of series and shunt arms of the
constant k low pass filter. Figure shows a constant k high pass filter.
212
Let
(i) when
(ii) when
213
The reactances z1 and z2 are shown in Fig.
The filter passes all the frequency beyond fC. All frequencies below the cutoff frequency lie in
attenuation or stop band. Hence the network is called a high pass filter.
5. Briefly discuss about m-derived filters?
Solution:
m-derived filters or m-type filters are a type of electronic filter designed using the image method.
They were invented by Otto Zobel in the early 1920s. This filter type was originally intended for
use with telephone multiplexing and was an improvement on the existing constant k type
filter. The main problem being addressed was the need to achieve a better match of the filter into
the terminating impedances. In general, all filters designed by the image method fail to give an
214
exact match, but the m-type filter is a big improvement with suitable choice of the parameter m.
The m-type filter section has a further advantage in that there is a rapid transition from the cut-
off frequency of the pass band to a pole of attenuation just inside the stop band. Despite these
advantages, there is a drawback with m-type filters; at frequencies past the pole of attenuation,
the response starts to rise again, and m-types have poor stop band rejection. For this reason,
filters designed using m-type sections are often designed as composite filters with a mixture of k-
type and m-type sections and different values of m at different points to get the optimum
performance from both types
The building block of m-derived filters, as with all image impedance filters, is the "L" network,
called a half-section and composed of a series impedance Z, and a shunt admittance Y. The m-
derived filter is a derivative of the constant k filter. The starting point of the design is the values
of Z and Y derived from the constant k prototype and are given by
Where k is the nominal impedance of the filter, or R0. The designer now multiplies Z and Y by
an arbitrary constant m (0 < m < 1). There are two different kinds of m-derived section; series
and shunt. To obtain the m-derived series half section, the designer determines the impedance
that must be added to 1/mY to make the image impedance ZiT the same as the image impedance
of the original constant k section. From the general formula for image impedance, the additional
impedance required can be shown to be
To obtain the m-derived shunt half section, an admittance is added to 1/mZ to make the image
impedance ZiΠ the same as the image impedance of the original half section. The additional
admittance required can be shown to be
The general arrangements of these circuits are shown in the diagrams to the right along with a
specific example of a low pass section.
215
A consequence of this design is that the m-derived half section will match a k-type section on
one side only. Also, an m-type section of one value of m will not match another m-type section
of another value of m except on the sides which offer the Zi of the k-type
Operating frequency
For the low-pass half section shown, the cut-off frequency of the m-type is the same as the k-
type and is given by
The pole of attenuation occurs at;
From this it is clear that smaller values of m will produce closer to the cut-off frequency and
hence will have a sharper cut-off. Despite this cut-off, it also brings the unwanted stop band
response of the m-type closer to the cut-off frequency, making it more difficult for this to be
filtered with subsequent sections. The value of m chosen is usually a compromise between these
conflicting requirements. There is also a practical limit to how small m can be made due to the
inherent resistance of the inductors. This has the effect of causing the pole of attenuation to be
less deep and the slope of cut-off to be less steep. This effect becomes more marked as is brought
closer to , and there ceases to be any improvement in response with an m of about 0.2 or less
Image impedance
The following expressions for image impedances are all referenced to the low-pass prototype
section. They are scaled to the nominal impedance R0 = 1, and the frequencies in those
expressions are all scaled to the cut-off frequency ωc = 1.
Series sections
The image impedances of the series section are given by
216
and is the same as that of the constant k section
Shunt sections
The image impedances of the shunt section are given by
As with the k-type section, the image impedance of the m-type low-pass section is purely real
below the cut-off frequency and purely imaginary above it. From the chart it can be seen that in
the pass band the closest impedance match to a constant pure resistance termination occurs at
approximately m = 0.6
Transmission parameters
For an m-derived section in general the transmission parameters for a half-section are given by
and for n half-sections
For the particular example of the low-pass L section, the transmission parameters solve
differently in three frequency bands.
217
For the transmission is lossless:
For the transmission parameters are
6. Design composite filters?

Solution:
Design of constant k- LPF filter

A low pass filter can be designed from the specifications of cutoff frequency and load.
At cutoff frequency fC,
218
Design of constant k- HPF filter
A high pass filter can be designed similar to the low pass filter by choosing a resistive load R
equal to the constant k such that
Design of constant k- BPF filter

If the filter is terminated in a load resistance R = k, then at lower cutoff frequency
219
Design of constant k- BSF filter
If the load is terminated in load resistance R = k, then at lower cutoff frequency,
220
221
16. UNIT WISE QUESTION BANK
UNIT I
2 Marks
1.Define Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.?
A) Faraday's law of induction is a basic law of electromagnetism predicting how a magnetic field will
interact with an electric circuit to produce an electromotive force (EMF)—a phenomenon called
electromagnetic induction.
2. Defineself-inductance?
A) Inductance is defined as the magnetic induction of a voltage in a current carrying wire when the
current in a wire changes. ... In the case of self-inductance, the magnetic field created by a changing
current in the circuit induces a voltage in the same wire or circuit - in other words any voltage is self-
induced.
3.Define mutual inductance?
Mutual Inductance is the basic operating principal of the transformer, motors, generators and any
other electrical component that interacts with another magnetic field. Then we can define mutual
induction as the current flowing in one coil that induces a voltage in an adjacent coil.
4. What is DOT convention?

Dot convention is mostly found in circuits where coupled systems occur. Dot convention helps us
determine the direction of winding of the coil and thereby makes it possible for us to find out the actual
polarity of the mutually induced emf
5. What is magnetization curve?
By plotting values of flux density, ( B ) against the field strength, ( H ) we can produce a set
of curves called Magnetization Curves
222
3 Marks
1) The resonant frequency of the series circuit shown in figure is
Sol. The coils are connected in a series opposing way. As the current is entering the dot of coil
L1 and leaving the dot of coil L2
𝑳𝒆𝒒 = 𝑳𝟏 + 𝑳𝟐 − 𝟐𝑴
=𝟐+𝟐−𝟐
= 𝟐𝑯
At resonance XL = XC
𝝎𝑳𝒆𝒒 = 𝟏/𝝎𝑪
𝝎 = 𝟏/√𝑳𝒆𝒒𝑪 = 𝟏 /(𝟐 × 𝟐) = 𝟏/𝟐𝒓𝒂𝒅/𝒔𝒆𝒄
𝒇 = 𝟏/𝟒𝝅𝑯𝒛
2) In the series circuit shown in figure, for series resonance, determine the value of the coupling
coefficient k?
Sol. The coils are connected in series additive manner as the current is entering the dot in both
coils
𝑳𝒆𝒒 = 𝑳𝟏 + 𝑳𝟐 + 𝟐𝑴
𝑴 = 𝑲/√(𝑳𝟏𝑳𝟐) = 𝑲/√(𝒋𝟐.𝒋𝟖) = 𝑲/𝒋𝟒
At resonance |𝑿𝑳| = |𝑿𝑪|
𝑿𝑳 = 𝑿𝑳𝟏 + 𝑿𝑳𝟐 + 𝑿𝑴
= 𝒋𝟐 + 𝒋𝟖 + 𝟐𝑲/𝒋𝟒=𝒋𝟏𝟎 + 𝟐𝑲/𝒋𝟒
At resonance 𝑿𝑳 = 𝑿𝑪
𝒋𝟏𝟎+(𝟐𝑲/𝒋𝟒)=𝒋/𝟏𝟐
𝟐𝑲𝒋. 𝟒 = 𝒋. 𝟐
𝒋𝑲. 𝟖 = 𝒋. 𝟐
223
𝑲 = 𝟐/𝟖 = 𝟏/𝟒 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟓
3) For the three coupled coils in Fig., calculate the total inductance.
Sol:
For coil 1, L1 – M12 + M13 = 6 – 4 + 2 = 4
For coil 2, L2 – M21 – M23 = 8 – 4 – 5 = – 1
For coil 3, L3 + M31 – M32 = 10 + 2 – 5 = 7
LT = 4 – 1 + 7 = 10H
or LT = L1 + L2 + L3 – 2M12 – 2M23 + 2M12
LT = 6 + 8 + 10 = 10H
4) Determine the inductance of the three series-connected inductors of Fig. 13.73.
Sol:
L = L1 + L2 + L3 + 2M12 – 2M23 –2M31
= 10 + 12 +8 + 2x6 – 2x6 –2x4= 22H
5) Two coils connected in series-aiding fashion have a total inductance of 250 mH. When
connected in a series-opposing configuration, the coils have a total inductance of 150 mH. If
the inductance of one coil (L1) is three times the other, find L1, L2, and M. What is the
coupling coefficient?
Sol:
L1 + L2 + 2M = 250 mH (1)
L1 + L2 – 2M = 150 mH (2)
Adding (1) and (2),
2L1 + 2L2 = 400 mH
But, L1 = 3L2,, or 8L2 + 400, and L2 = 50 mH
L1 = 3L2 = 150 mH
From (2), 150 + 50 – 2M = 150 leads to M = 25 mH
k = M/ L1L2 = 25 / 50x150 = 0.2887
1. Explain the Faradays laws?
Solution:
Consider an iron ring on which a coil is wound. Most rings are made like anchor rings in that
their cross selection is circular. Such a ring is called a toroid. Whenever a current is flowing
through the coil there will be magnetic flux produced and the path fallowed by the magnetic flux
is known as magnetic circuit.
224
Reluctance of magnetic circuit is defined as the ratio of magneto motive
FARADAYS LAWS OF ELECTRO MAGNETIC INDUCTION:

In 1831, Michael Faraday formulated two laws on the bases of experiments. These laws are
called Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction.
FIRST LAW:
First Law of Faraday's Electromagnetic Induction state that whenever a conductor are placed in a
varying magnetic field emf are induced which is called induced emf, if the conductor circuit are
closed current are also induced which is called induced current.
(OR)
Whenever a current carrying conductor is rotated in magnetic field it will induces an emf.
SECOND LAW:
Second Law of Faraday's Electromagnetic
c Induction state that the induced emf is equal to the
rate of change of flux linkages (flux linkages is the product of turns, n of the coil and the flux
associated with it).
Explanation:
Consider a magnet approaching towards a coil. Here we consider two instants of time T 1 and
time T2.
Flux linkage with the coil at time, T1= NΦ1Weber (wb)
Flux linkage with the coil at time, T2=NΦ2wb
Change in flux linkage = N (Φ2–Φ1)
Let this change in flux linkage be, Φ = Φ2–Φ1
So, the Change in flux linkage = NΦ
Now the rate of change of flux linkage = NΦ / t
225
Take derivative on right hand side we will get The rate of change of flux linkage = NdΦ/dt
But according to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, the rate of change of flux linkage is
equal to induced emf.
Therefore,
According to lenz’s law,

Where Φ in weber, Φ = B * A
B = magnetic field strength
A = area of the coil
From this, Faraday concluded that whenever there is relative motion between conductor and a
magnetic field, the flux linkage with a coil changes and this change in flux induces a voltage
across a coil.
2.Explain the concept of self and mutual inductance?
Solution:
Self Induction:
Inductance is the property of the circuit element which will oppose any change of current
through it. By Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction, it fallows that whenever there is
change of flux linking with a coil with time, and then there will be an induced emf in the coil.
The induced emf is proportional to the rate of change flux linkages of the coil.
Where N is the number of turns in the coil and Φ is the flux in weber in the coil.
The negative sign indicates that the direction of induced emf is such that it opposes the every
cause which is producing it, also known as LENZ’S law. Since the flux in the coil is directly
proportional to current flowing in it, the emf induced is proportional to the rate of change of
current.
If the current I and flux linkages refer to the same physical system, than the parameter L is
called self inductance. It is measured in HENRYS.
Mutual Inductance:
Let us consider that there are two coils which are placed on the same magnetic core such that the
flux produced by current flowing through one coil completely links with the other coils also. Let
the coil1 is connected to AC supply and coil2 is open circuit.
226
A current flowing in the first coil produces a flux as shown in fig. The direction of time varying
flux is given by right hand thumb rule. The flux produced by current not only links with the coil1
but also links with coil2. The emf induced in coil1 is called self induced emf.
The proportionality constant M21 between induced emf in the second coil and rate of change of
current in the first coil is called mutual inductance. Any two such coils are said to be
magnetically coupled.
The unit of mutual inductance is HENRY. The mutual inductance between two coils is said to be
1 Henry when a change of current of 1 Amp/Sec in one coil produces a mutual induced emf of 1
volt in the other coil.
Self induced emf in coil1,
Mutual induced emf in the coil2,
Let us assume that second coil also carries a current of i2 as shown in fig, which in turn produces
a self induced emf in coil2 and a mutual induced emf in coil1.
Self induced emf in coil2
Mutual induced emf in the coil1=
In practice all the flux produced by current in one coil may not completely link with the other
coil. Depending on the position and orientation of the two coils, only a fraction of the flux may
be linking with the other coil. Then the two circuits are said to be loosely coupled and if all the
flux is linking with the other coil, then they are said to tightly coupled.
227
3.Explain the following terms?
c) What is coefficient of coupling? Derive the formula for K?

d) Discuss dot notation?
Solution:
Coefficient of Coupling:
It is the factor which indicates the degree of coupling between the coupled coils given by
Expressing (1) in terms of self and mutual inductances,
If M21 = M12 = M then we get,
This will be equal to 1 if coils are coupled tightly
228
Coefficient of coupling is also defined as the ratio of mutual flux to total flux. It is always less
than one (K<=1) (this is the principle used in transformer).
Dot Notation
The Polarity or Dot Notation for a device with mutual inductance designates the relative
instantaneous current directions of such device's winding leads.
The physical criteria of this notation is to preserve a proper magnetic flow circuit direction inside
the material. Keeping all current entering a transformer or coupled inductances, in phase, through
dotted leads or ports will keep the magnetic flow circulating without canceling each other, and
the device will work under their rated efficiency.
Entering current on different dotted ports -one in a dotted port and the other with an un-dotted
port- will cause the magnetic flow components to subtract each other, making the device
working inefficiently. This criteria holds for devices with several coils, in order to have each of
them aggregating in an additive way by entering dotted ports.
Leads of primary and secondary windings are said to be of the same polarity when instantaneous
current entering the primary winding lead results in instantaneous current leaving the secondary
winding lead as though the two leads were a continuous circuit. In the case of two windings
wound around the same core in parallel, for example, the polarity will be the same on the same
ends: A sudden (instantaneous) current in the first coil will induce a voltage opposing the sudden
increase (Lenz's law) in the first and also in the second coil, because the inductive magnetic field
produced by the current in the first coil traverses the two coils in the same manner. The second
coil will, therefore, show an induced current opposite in direction to the inducing current in the
first coil. Both leads behave like a continuous circuit, one current entering into the first lead and
another current leaving the second lead.
Referring to the circuit diagrams below:[dubious – discuss] The circuit polarity signs '+' and '-'
indicate the relative polarities of the induced voltages in both coils, i.e. how an instantaneous
(sudden) magnetic field traversing the primary and secondary coils induces a voltage in both
coils.
The instantaneous polarities of the voltages across each inductor with respect to the dotted
terminals are the same.
The circuit arrows indicate example applied and resultant relative current directions. The '+' and
'-' polarities in the diagram are not the voltages driving the currents.
The instantaneous directions of the current entering the primary inductor at its dotted end and the
current leaving of the secondary inductor at its dotted end are the same.
Subtractive polarity transformer designs are shown in the upper circuit diagrams. Additive
polarity transformer designs are shown in the lower circuit diagrams.
229
4.Discuss series and parallel magnetic circuits?
Solution:
Composite Magnetic Circuits
Consider a circular ring made from different materials of lengths l1, l2 and l3, cross-sectional
areas a1, a2 and a3 and relative permeability r1, r2 andr3 respectively with a cut of
length lg known as air-gap. The total reluctance is the arithmetic sum of individual reluctances as
they are joined in series.
230
Or Total ampere-turns required
= Sum of ampere-turns required for individual parts of the magnetic circuit.

Parallel Magnetic Circuits
In series circuits, all parts of the magnetic circuit carry same flux and total ampere-turns required
to create a given flux is the arithmetic sum of the ampere-turns required for individual parts of
the circuit.
But if the various paths of the magnetic circuit are in parallel, as shown in Fig. 4 the ampere-
turns required for the combination is equal to the ampere-turns required to create the given flux
in one path.
For example, for the circuit shown in Fig. 4 paths ABCD and AFED are in parallel, so ampere-
turns required creating flux in path ABCD is equal to ampere-turns required to create
flux in path AFED and also equal to the ampere-turns required for both of the paths.
Hence total ampere-turns required for magnetic circuit shown in Fig. 4.
= AT for path DA + AT for path ABCD
= AT for path DA + AT for path AFED
5.For the given network draw a graph and a tree. Select suitable tree branch voltage
and write the cut-set schedule. Write equation for the branch voltages in terms of
tree branch?
Solution:
No of nodes of a tree, nt = 6
No of tree branches, n= 6-1 = 5
Cut-set schedule:
231
Treebranch voltages Branch voltages (v)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 -1 0 1 0 -1 0 0 1 0 0 -1 1
2 -1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0
4 -1 1 0 0 -1 0 1 0 0 0 -1 1
5 -1 1 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tree Branch Basic Cut-Set

e1 1, 3, 5, 8, 11, 12
e2 1, 4, 3, 9
e3 4, 5, 10, 11
e4 1, 2, 5, 7, 11, 12
e5 1, 2, 5, 6
The equations are, r1 = - e1 - e2 - e4 - e5

r2 = e4 + e5
r3 = e1 + e2
r4 = - e2 + e3
r5 = - e1 - e3 - e4 - e5
r6 = e5
r7 = e4
r8 = e1
r9 = e2
r10 = e3
r11 = - e1 - e3 - e4
r12 = e1 + e4
232
UNIT II
2 Marks
1. What are the advantages of a poly phase system over a single-phase system?
A) 1. A polyphone transmission line requires less conductor material than a single-phase line for
transmitting the same amount power at the same voltage.
2. For a given frame size a polyphone machine gives a higher output than a single-phase machine For
example, output of a 3-phase motor is 1.5 times the output of single-phase motor of same size
3. Polyphone motors have a uniform torque where most of the single-phase motors have a pulsating
torque.
2. Define Unbalanced three-phase systems
A) This chapter would be incomplete without mentioning unbalanced three phase systems. An
Thus,
An unbalanced system is due to unbalanced voltage sources or an unbalanced load.
3 Marks
1) If Vab = 400 V in a balanced Y-connected three-phase generator, find the phase voltages,
assuming the phase sequence is: (a) abc (b) acb.
Sol:
233
2) For the Y-Y circuit of Fig. 12.41, find the line currents, the line voltages, and the load
voltages.
Sol:
3) A balanced Y-Y four-wire system has phase voltages Van=120∠00, Vbn=120∠−120°Vcn=120∠1200.

The load impedance per phase is 19 + j13 Ω, and the line impedance per phase is 1+ j2Ω. Solve for
the line currents and neutral current.
Sol:
4) A balanced delta-connected load has a phase current IAC=10∠−30°A. (a) Determine the three
line currents assuming that the circuit operates in the positive phase sequence.
(b) Calculate the load impedance if the line voltage is VAB=110∠0°V.
234
5. Marks
1.Explain star and delta connections of three phase system?
Solution:
In three phase circuit, connections can be given in two types:
iii) Star connection
iv) Delta connection
Star Connection:
In star connection, there is four wire, three wires are phase wire and fourth is neutral which is
taken from the star point. Star connection is preferred for long distance power
transmission because it is having the neutral point. In this we need to come to the concept of
balanced and unbalanced current in power system.
When equal current will flow through all the three phases, then it is called as balanced current.
And when the current will not be equal in any of the phase, then it is unbalanced current. In this
case, during balanced condition there will be no current flowing through the neutral line and
hence there is no use of the neutral terminal. But when there will be unbalanced current flowing
in the three phase circuit, neutral is having a vital role. It will take the unbalanced current
through to the ground and protect the transformer. Unbalanced current affects transformer and it
may also cause damage to the transformer and for this star connection is preferred for long
distance transmission. The star connection is shown below-
235
In star connection, the line voltage is √3 times of phase voltage. Line voltage is
the voltage between two phases in three phase circuit and phase voltage is the voltage between
one phase to the neutral line. And the current is same for both line and phase. It is shown as
expression below
Delta Connection:
In delta connection, there is three wires alone and no neutral terminal is taken. Normally delta
connection is preferred for short distance due to the problem of unbalanced current in the circuit.
The figure is shown below for delta connection.
In the load station, ground can be used as neutral path if required. In delta connection, the line
voltage is same with that of phase voltage. And the line current is √3 times of phase current. It is
shown as expression below,
Three-phase voltages are often produced with a three-phase ac generator (or alternator) whose
cross-sectional view is shown in Fig. The generator basically consists of a rotating magnet
(called the rotor) surrounded by a stationary winding (called the stator). Three separate windings
or coils with terminals a-a’, b-b’, and c-c’are physically placed 120◦ apart around the stator.
Terminals a and a’, for example, stand for one of the ends of coils going into and the other end
coming out of the page. As the rotor rotates, its magnetic field “cuts” the flux from the three coils
and induces voltages in the coils. Because the coils are placed 120◦ apart, the induced voltages in
the coils are equal in magnitude but out of phase by 120◦ (Fig. 12.5). Since each coil can be
regarded as a single-phase generator by itself, the three-phase generator can supply power to
both single-phase and three-phase loads.
236
A typical three-phase system consists of three voltage sources connected to loads by three or four
wires (or transmission lines). (Three phase current sources are very scarce.) A three-phase
system is equivalent to three single-phase circuits. The voltage sources can be either wye-
connected as shown in Fig. (a) or delta-connected as in Fig. (b).
Let us consider the wye-connected voltages in Fig. (a) for now.
The voltages Van, Vbn, and Vcn are respectively between lines a, b, and c, and the neutral line n.
These voltages are called phase voltages. If the voltage sources have the same amplitude and
frequency ω and are out of phase with each other by 120◦, the voltages are said to be balanced.
This implies that
Van + Vbn + Vcn = 0
|Van| = |Vbn| = |Vcn|
Thus, Balanced phase voltages are equal in magnitude and are out of phase with each other by
120◦. Since the three-phase voltages are 120◦ out of phase with each other, there are two
possible combinations. One possibility is shown in Fig. (a) and expressed mathematically as
Van=Vp0◦
Vbn=Vp −120◦
Vcn=Vp−240◦ =Vp+120◦
where Vp is the effective or rms value. This is known as the abc sequence or positive sequence.
In this phase sequence, Van leads Vbn, which in turn leads Vcn. This sequence is produced when
the rotor in Fig. rotates counterclockwise. The other possibility is shown in Fig. (b)and is given
by
The phase sequence is the time order in which the voltages pass through their respective
maximum values.
237
This is called the acb sequence or negative sequence. For this phase sequence, Van leads Vcn,
which in turn leads Vbn. The acb sequence is produced when the rotor in Fig. rotates in the
clockwise direction.
Like the generator connections, a three-phase load can be either wye-connected or delta-
connected, depending on the end application. Fig. (a) shows a wye-connected load, and Fig. (b)
shows a delta-connected load. The neutral line in Fig.(a) may or may not be there, depending on
whether the system is four- or three-wire. A wye- or delta-connected load is said to be
unbalanced if the phase impedances are not equal in magnitude or phase.
Two possible three phase load configurations:

(a) a Y-connected load,
(b) a Delta-connected load
A balanced load is one in which the phase impedances are equal in magnitude and in phase. For
a balanced wye-connected load,
Z1= Z2 = Z3= ZY
Where ZY is the load impedance per phase. For a balanced delta-connected load,
Za = Zb = Zc = Z
where Z is the load impedance per phase in this case. We recall from Eq. that
Z= 3ZY or ZY= (1/3)Z
So we know that a wye-connected load can be transformed into a delta connected load, or vice
versa, using Eq. Since both the three-phase source and the three-phase load can be either wye- or
238
delta-connected, we have four possible connections: Y-Y connection (i.e., Y-connected source
with a Y-connected load).
• Y-connection.
• - connection.
•-Y connection.
It is appropriate to mention here that a balanced delta-connected load is more common than a
balanced wye-connected load. This is due to the ease with which loads may be added or removed
from each phase of a delta-connected load. This is very difficult with a wye-connected load
because the neutral may not be accessible. On the other hand, delta connected sources are not
common in practice because of the circulating current that will result in the delta-mesh if the
three-phase voltages are slightly unbalanced.
2.Deriving relation between line and phase voltages and currents in a star connection and
expression for power- (40 min)
Solution:
To derive the relations between line and phase currents and voltages of a star connected system,
we have first to draw a balanced star connected system.
Suppose due to load impedance the current lags the applied voltage in each phase of the system
by an angle ϕ. As we have considered that the system is perfectly balanced, the magnitude of
current and voltage of each phase is the same. Let us say, the magnitude of the voltage across the
red phase i.e. magnitude of the voltage between neutral point (N) and red phase terminal (R) is
VR.
239
Similarly, the magnitude of the voltage across yellow phase is VY and the magnitude of the
voltage across blue phase is VB. In the balanced star system, magnitude of phase voltage in each
phase is Vph.
∴ VR = VY = VB = Vph
We know in the star connection, line current is same as phase current. The magnitude of
this current is same in all three phases and say it is IL.
∴ IR = IY = IB = IL, Where, IR is line current of R phase, IY is line current of Y phase and IB is line
current of B phase. Again, phase current, Iph of each phase is same as line current IL in star
connected system.
∴ IR = IY = IB = IL = Iph.
Now, let us say, the voltage across R and Y terminal of the star connected circuit is VRY.
The voltage across Y and B terminal of the star connected circuit is VYB The voltage across B
and R terminal of the star connected circuit is VBR.
From the diagram, it is found that
VRY = VR + (− VY)
Similarly, VYB = VY + (− VB)
And, VBR = VB + (− VR)
Now, as angle between VR and VY is 120o(electrical),

the angle between VR and – VY is 180o – 120o = 60o(electrical).
Thus, for the star-connected system line voltage = √3 × phase voltage.

Line current = Phase current
As, the angle between voltage and current per phase is φ, the electric power per phase is
240
So the total power of three phase system is
3.Deriving relation between line and phase voltages and currents in delta or mesh
connection?
Solution:
Relation Between Phase Voltage and Line Voltage in Delta Connection
241
t is clear from the figure that the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 is the same as across the
Similarly,
Delta Connection in a 3 Phase System
242
Relation between Phase Voltage and Line Voltage in Delta Connection
243
It is clear from the figure that the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 is the same as across the
Similarly,
Where, the phase voltages are
The line voltages are
Hence, in Delta Connection Line Voltage is equal to Phase Voltage.
244
Relation between Phase Current and Line Current in Delta Connection
As in the balanced system the three phase current I12, I23 and I31 are equal in magnitude but are
displaced from one another by 120 degrees electrical.
The phasor diagram is shown below.
Hence,
If we look at figure A, it is seen that the current is divided at every junction 1, 2 and 3.
Applying Kirchhoff’s Law at junction 1
The Incoming currents are equal to outgoing currents.
And their vector difference will be given as
The vector I12 is reversed and is added in the vector I31 to get the vector sum of I31 and –I12 as
shown above in the phasor diagram. Therefore,
245
As we know, IR = IL, therefore,
Similarly,
Hence, in Delta connection line current is root three times of phase current.
4.Wright short notes on analysis of balanced and unbalanced 3 phase

circuits?
Solution:
Requirements of a Balanced 3-Phase Set
Following are the requirements that must be satisfied in order for a set of 3 sinusoidal variables
(usually voltages or currents) to be a "balanced 3-phase set"
All 3 variables have the same amplitude.
All 3 variables have the same frequency.
All 3 variables are 120o in phase.
In terms of the time domain, a set of balance 3-phase voltages has the following general form.
Va= Vmcos ( t+ )
Vb= Vmcos( t+ -120o)
246
Vc= Vmcos( t+ -240o)= Vmcos( t+ +120o)
Notice that we have assumed (and will continue to assume) positive (abc) phase sequence, i.e.,
phase "b" follows 120o behind "a" & phase "c" follows 120o behind phase "b"
Figure below illustrates the balanced 3-phase voltages in time domain.
Figure: Balanced 3-Phase Variables in Time Domain
In terms of phasors, we write the same balanced set as follows. Note that the phasors are in
rms.
Va=Vm ˚
Vb=Vm -120o
Vc=Vm -240o=Vm +120o
Thus,
Vb=Va -120o, and Vc=Va +120o
Figure below illustrates the balanced 3-phase phasor graphically.
Figure: Balanced 3-Phase Phasors

Requirements of a Balanced 3-Phase Circuit
Following are the requirements that must be satisfied in order for a 3-phase system or circuit to
be balanced
All 3 sources are represented by a set of balanced 3-phase variables
All loads are 3-phase with equal impedances
Line impedances are equal in all 3 phases
Having a balanced circuit allows for simplified analysis of the 3-phase circuit. In fact, if the
circuit is balanced, we can solve for the voltages, currents, and powers, etc. in one phase using
247
circuit analysis. The values of the corresponding variables in the other two phases can be found
using some basic equations. This type of solution is accomplished using a "one-line diagram",
which will be discussed later. If the circuit is not balanced, all three phases should be analyzed
in detail.
Figure below illustrates a balanced 3-phase circuit and some of the naming conventions to be
used in this course
Figure: A Balanced 3-Phase Circuit
Unbalanced three-phase systems:

This chapter would be incomplete without mentioning unbalanced three phase systems. An
Thus,
An unbalanced systemis due to unbalanced voltage sources or an unbalanced load.
Figure shows an example of an unbalanced three-phase system that consists of balanced source
voltages (notshown in the figure) and an unbalanced Y-connected load (shown in the figure).
Since the load is unbalanced, ZA, ZB, and ZC are not equal. The line currents are determined by
Ohm’s law asIa=VAN/ZA, Ib=VBN/ZB, Ic=VCN/ZC
This set of unbalanced line currents produces current in the neutral line, which is not zero as in a
balanced system. Applying KCL at node N gives the neutral line current as In=−(Ia+Ib+Ic)
In a three-wire system where the neutral line is absent, we can still find the line currents Ia, Ib,
and Icusing mesh analysis. At node N, KCL must be satisfied so that Ia+Ib+Ic= 0 in this case. The
248
same could be done for a -Y, Y-, or -three-wire system. As mentioned earlier, in long
distance power transmission, conductors in multiples of three (multiple three-wire systems) are
used, with the earth itself acting as the neutral conductor.
To calculate power in an unbalanced three-phase system requires that we find the power in each
phase using above Equations. The total power is not simply three times the power in one phase
but the sum of the powers in the three phases.
5.Discuss the different methods to measure the 3 phase active and power?
Solution:
3-Phase Power:
The 3-phase (3 ) power of a circuit is simply the sum of the power in the three individual phases.
Thus for a Wye circuit, the equation is
S3 = Sa + Sb + Sc
and for a Delta circuit, the equation is
Another advantage of having a balanced circuit is that each phase has the same power.
That is,
S = Sab = Sbc = Sca = Sa = Sb = Sc
so that,
S3 = 3 S = 3 Sab = 3 Sa
Just in case you didn't know, right now you should be thinking "This is very cool!"
The single phase power can be found using either
S = Va Ia* or S = Vab Iab*
We can do some interesting rearrangements to get the power in terms of the line voltage (Vab)
and line current (Ia) only.
S = Va Ia* = |Va| | Ia|* = {|Vab| / }| Ia| =S

Thus, S3 = 3 S
Note:
In balanced systems, all the S 's and S3 have the same power factor (pf) and thus the same
power factor angle = impedance angle. .
If Xa, Xb, and Xc are a balanced set,

Xb = Xa (1 -120o) , and
Xc = Xa (1 +120o)
In general,
S3 = Sa + Sb + Sc
For a balanced system,
S3 = 3 S
S = Va Ia*
S = Vab Iab*
249
For the balanced and positive sequence case,
Vab = Va 30o
Ia = IAB -30o
Various methods are used measurement of three phase power in three phase circuits on the basis
of number of wattmeter used.
We have three methods:
4. Measurement of Three Phase Power by Three Wattmeters Method
The circuit diagram is shown below-
Here, it is applied to three phase four wire systems, current coil of all the three wattmeters
marked as one, two and three are connected to respective phases marked as one, two and three.
Pressure coils of all the three wattmeter are connected to common point at neutral line. Clearly
each wattmeter will give reading as product of phase current and line voltage which is phase
power. The resultant sum of all the readings of wattmeter will give the total power of the circuit.
Mathematically we can
5. Measurement of Three Phase Power by Two Wattmeters Method
In this method we have two types of connections: Star connection of loads and
Delta connection of loads.
When the star connected load, the diagram is shown in below-
250
For star connected load clearly the reading of wattmeter one is product phase current and voltage
difference (V2-V3). Similarly the reading of wattmeter two is the product of phase current and
the voltage difference (V2-V3). Thus the total power of the circuit is sum of the reading of both
the wattmeters.
Mathematically we can write
but we have ,
Hence putting the value of .
We get total power as .
When delta connected load, the diagram is shown in below
The reading of wattmeter one can be written as

and
reading of wattmeter two is
But
,
Hence expression for total power will reduce to
.
UNIT III
2 Marks
1. What is transient analysis?

The transient analysis is always used when you want to view a graph of a voltage or current as a
function of time. Even if the voltages are DC as in the previous tutorials, transient analysis must be used
to view a graph of the output versus time.
2. What is transient structural analysis?

Transient dynamic analysis (sometimes called time-history analysis) is a technique used to
determine the dynamic response of a structure under the action of any general time-dependent loads.
251
3.What is transient in circuit
In electrical engineering, oscillation is an effect caused by a transient response of a circuit or
system. It is a momentary event preceding the steady state (electronics) during a sudden change of
a circuit. Mathematically, it can be modeled as a damped harmonic oscillator
4. What is a transient effect?

Transient Effects in Conditional Mean Model Simulations. When you use automatically
generated preamble data, you often see some transient effects at the beginning of the simulation. This is
sometimes called a burn-in period. For stationary processes, the impulse response function decays to zero
over time
5. What causes a transient voltage?

Voltage Transients are defined as short duration surges of electrical energy and are the result of
the sudden release of energy previously stored or induced by other means, such as heavy inductive loads
or lightning
3 Marks
1) For the circuit shown in the figure, the time constant RC =1ms. The input voltage is
𝑉𝑖(𝑡)=√2sin103𝑡. Determine the output voltage V0(t)?
Sol.𝑽𝟏(𝒕) = √𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟏𝟎𝟑𝒕
𝝎 =𝟏𝟎𝟑𝒓𝒂𝒅𝒊𝒂𝒏𝒔/𝒔𝒆𝒄
𝑹𝑪 = 𝟏𝒎 𝒔𝒆𝒄
𝑽𝟎(𝒕)=[𝑽𝟏(𝒕)/(𝑹+𝟏/𝒋𝝎𝒄)]×(𝟏/𝒋𝝎𝒄 )
=𝑽𝟏(𝒕)/(𝒋𝝎𝑹𝑪+𝟏)=√𝟐𝐬𝐢𝐧𝟏𝟎𝟑𝒕/(𝒋𝟏𝟎𝟑×𝟏𝟎−𝟑+𝟏)
=√𝟐𝐬𝐢𝐧𝟏𝟎𝟑𝒕/(𝟏+𝒋 )
=𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟏𝟎𝟑𝒕−𝟒𝟓𝟎)
2) An input voltage 𝑣(𝑡)=10√2cos(𝑡+100)+10√5cos(2𝑡+ 100) V is applied to a series

combinationof R = 1 Ω and an inductance L = 1H. Find out the resulting steady state current
i(t) in ampere?
Sol. 𝑽(𝒕) = 𝟏𝟎√𝟐𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎) + 𝟏𝟎√𝟓𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)
𝑽(𝒕) = 𝟏𝟎√𝟐𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎) + 𝟏𝟎√𝟓𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)
𝝎𝟏 = 𝟏, 𝝎𝟐 = 𝟐
Steady state current 𝒊(𝒕) = 𝒊𝟏(𝒕) + 𝒊𝟐(𝒕)
= [𝟏𝟎√𝟐𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/(𝑹 + 𝒋𝛚𝟏𝑳)] +[𝟏𝟎√𝟓𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/(𝑹 + 𝒋𝛚𝟏𝑳)]
= [𝟏𝟎√𝟐𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/(𝟏 + 𝒋)] + [𝟏𝟎√𝟓𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/(𝟏 + 𝟐𝒋)]
= [𝟏𝟎√𝟐𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/√𝟐∠𝟒𝟓𝟎 + 𝟏𝟎√𝟓𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟎)/√𝟓∠𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏𝟐
= 𝟏𝟎𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝒕 − 𝟑𝟓𝟎) + 𝟏𝟎𝐜𝐨𝐬(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟏𝟎𝟐− 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏𝟐)
3) The R-L-C Series circuit with 𝑅 = 13 Ω, 𝐿 = 14 𝐻, 𝐶 = 3 F has input voltage V(t) = Sin2t.
Determine the resulting current i(t)?
Sol.Admittance 𝒀 = 𝟏/𝑹 + 𝟏/𝒋𝝎𝑳 + 𝒋𝝎𝑪 = 𝟑 + 𝟒/𝒋𝟐 + 𝒋𝟐 × 𝟑
252
= 𝟑 − 𝒋𝟐 + 𝒋𝟔
= 𝟑 + 𝒋𝟒
𝒊(𝒕) = 𝑽(𝒕). 𝒚
= (𝟑 + 𝟒𝒋) 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝒕
= 𝟓 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝒕 ∠ 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏( 𝟒/𝟑)
= 𝟓 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝟐𝒕 + 𝟓𝟑. 𝟏𝟎)
4) In the figure, the switch was closed for a long time before opening at t = 0. Determine the voltage
Vx at t = 0+?
Soln. When the switch was closed for a long time, the steady state is reached and inductor is short
circuit.
𝑰𝑳(𝟎−) = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑨
The current cannot change instantaneously in a inductor 𝑰𝑳(𝟎−) = 𝑰𝑳(𝟎+) = 𝟐. 𝟓 𝑨
At 𝒕 = 𝟎+ inductor can be replaced by a current source of 2.5A. The equivalent circuit for the same is
drawn.
𝑽 = 𝟐𝟎 × 𝟐. 𝟓
= 𝟓𝟎 𝑽
𝑽𝑿 = 𝑽 is of opposite polarity
𝑽𝑿 = −𝟓𝟎𝑽
5) For the R-L circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage Vi(t) = u(t). Plot the current i(t)?
Sol. 𝑰(𝑺)=𝑽𝟏(𝑺)/(𝑳𝑺+𝟐)=𝟏/𝑺(𝑺+𝟐)
= (𝟏/𝟐)[𝟏/𝑺−𝟏/(𝑺 + 𝟐)]
𝒊(𝒕)=(𝟏/𝟐)−(𝟏/𝟐)𝒆−𝟐𝒕
A𝒕 𝒕=𝟎, 𝒊(𝟎)=(𝟏/𝟐)−(𝟏/𝟐) = 𝟎
A𝒕 𝒕=∞, 𝒊(∞)= (𝟏/𝟐)
A𝒕 𝒕=𝟏/𝟐, 𝒊(𝟏/𝟐)=(𝟏/𝟐)(𝟏− 𝒆−𝟏)
=(𝟏/𝟐)*(𝟏−𝟎. 𝟑𝟔𝟖)= 𝟎. 𝟑𝟏𝟔
253
5 Marks
1. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L series circuit for dc excitation?
Solution:
DC Response of an R-L Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of a resistance and inductance as shown in fig. the inductor in the
circuit is initially uncharged and is in series with the resistor. When switch S is closed, we can
find the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s law to the circuit results in
following differential equations.
In the above equation, the current i is the solution to be found and V is the applied constant
voltage. The voltage V is applied to the circuit only when the switch S is closed. The above
equation is linear differential equation of the first order comparing with the non homogenous
differential equation
Where c is an arbitrary constant,

in similar way we can write the current equation as
254
To determine the value of ‘c’, in equation (5) we use initial conditions. In the circuit shown in fig
the switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0–, i.e. just before closing the switch S, the current in the
inductor is zero. Since the inductor does not allow sudden changes in currents, at t=0+ just after
the switch is closed, the current remains zero.
Substituting above conditions we get,
0 = c +(V/R)
Therefore, c = -V/R
Hence from equation
Above equation consists of two parts, the steady state part (V/R) and other is transient part.
the voltages and powers across each element by using the current.
255
2. Derive the expression for transient response of R-C series circuit for dc excitation?
Solution:
DC Response of an R-C Circuit:
256
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and capacitance as shown in fig. the capacitor in the
circuit is initially uncharged, and is in series with resistor. When the switch S is closed at t=0, we
can determine the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can
By differentiating the above equation we get,
Equation is linear differential equation with only the complementary function. The particular
solution for the above equation is zero. The solution for this type of differential equation is
Here, to find the value of c, we use the initial conditions. In the circuit shown in fig switch S is
closed at t=0. Since the capacitor never allows sudden changes in voltage, it will act as short at
t=0+. So, the current in the circuit at t=0+ is V/R.
Substituting the i value in equation we get,
When switch S is closed, the response decays with time as shown in fig. In the solution, the
quantity RC is the time constant, and is denoted by r, where r= RC seconds.
the voltage across each element by using the current equation.
Voltage across the resistor
257
Similarly, voltage across the capacitor
At t=0, voltage across the capacitor is zero.
Power in the resistor,
Power in the capacitor,
The responses are shown in fig.
3. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L-C series circuit for dc
excitation?
Solution:
258
DC Response of an R-L-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance, inductance and capacitance as shown in fig. the
capacitor and inductor are initially uncharged, and are in series with a resistor. When the switch
S is closed at t=0, we can determine the complete solution for current. Application of Kirchhoff’s
laws we can determine the differential equations.
The above equation is a second order linear differential equation, with only complementary
function. The particular solution for the above equation is zero. Characteristic equation for the
above differential equation is
By assuming,
259
K2 is positive,
The roots are real and unequal, and give the over damped response as shown in fig. then equation
(4) becomes
K Is negative,
260
K Is zero,
When
261
K Is negative,
K Is zero,
When
262
4. Derive the expression for transient response of R-L series circuit for ac excitation?
Solution:
Sinusoidal Response of R-L Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and inductance are connected as shown in fig. the
switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0, sinusoidal voltage Vcos(wt + 8) applied to RL circuit, where V
is the amplitude of the wave and 8 is the phase angle. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can
The corresponding characteristic equation is
For the above equation, the solution consists of two parts. One is complementary
function and other is particular integral.
263
The complementary function of the solution is
The particular solution can be obtained by using undetermined co-efficient.

By assuming,
Substituting equations 5 & 6 in 3 we get,
Comparing cosine terms and sine terms, we get
From the above equations we have
Substituting the A and B values in equation (5) we get
264
Since the inductor does not allow sudden changes in currents, at t=0, i=0
5. Derive the expression for transient response of R-C series circuit for ac excitation?
Solution:
265
Sinusoidal Response of R-C Circuit:
Consider a circuit consisting of resistance and capacitance in series as shown

in fig. the switch S is closed at t=0. At t=0, sinusoidal voltage Vcos(wt + 8)
applied to RL circuit, where V is the amplitude of the wave and 8 is the phase
angle. Application of Kirchhoff’s laws we can determine the differential
equations.
The complementary function,
266
Substituting equation 4 & 5 in 3 we get
Comparing both sides,
So we get,
Substituting A and B values in 4 we get
267
Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltages,
268
Therefore,
UNIT IV
3 Marks
1) A 2-port network is shown in the figure. Determine the parameter h21 for this network?
Soln. 𝑽𝟏=𝒉𝟏𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒉𝟏𝟐𝑽𝟐
𝑰𝟐=𝒉𝟐𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒉𝟐𝟐𝑽𝟐
𝒉𝟐𝟏=𝑰𝟏/𝑰𝟐|𝑽𝟐=𝟎
𝑽𝟐=𝑹𝑰𝟐+𝑹(𝑰𝟏+𝑰𝟐)
Or 𝟐𝑹𝑰𝟐+𝑹𝑰𝟏=𝑽𝟐
When 𝑽𝟐 =𝟎, 𝟐𝑹𝑰𝟐+𝑹𝑰𝟏=𝟎
So, 𝑰𝟐/𝑰𝟏=−𝑹/𝟐𝑹=−𝟏/𝟐
2) The Z parameters Z11 and Z21 for the 2-port network in the figure are
269
Sol. For z – parameters
𝑬𝟏= 𝒁𝟏𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒁𝟏𝟐𝑰𝟐
𝑬𝟐 = 𝒁𝟐𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒁𝟐𝟐𝑰𝟐
Writing KVL in LHS loop
𝑬𝟏 = 𝟐𝑰𝟏+𝟒𝑰𝟏+𝟒𝑰𝟐−𝟏𝟎𝑬𝟏
Or 𝟏𝟏𝑬𝟏=𝟔𝑰𝟏+𝟒𝑰𝟐 − − − −(𝑰)
At I2=0; 𝒁𝟏𝟏=𝑬𝟏/𝑰𝟏 = 𝟔/𝟏𝟏 Ω
At I1=0 𝒁𝟏𝟐=𝑬𝟏/𝑰𝟐= 𝟒/𝟏𝟏 Ω
Writing KVL in RHS Loop
𝑬𝟐=𝟒(𝑰𝟏+𝑰𝟐)−𝟏𝟎𝑬𝟏 − − − − − (𝑰𝑰)
Substituting 𝑬𝟏= 𝟔𝑰𝟏+𝟒𝑰𝟐/𝟏𝟏𝒊𝒏𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒂𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 − −(𝑰𝑰𝑰)
𝑬𝟐=𝟒(𝑰𝟏+𝑰𝟐)−𝟏𝟎(𝟔𝑰𝟏+𝟒𝑰𝟐)/𝟏𝟏
At I2=0; 𝒁𝟐𝟏=𝑬𝟐/𝑰𝟏= −𝟏𝟔/𝟏𝟏 Ω
3. Determine the impedance parameters Z11 and Z12 of the two-port network shown in the
figure?
Soln. Using Δ − 𝒀conversion, the circuit reduces to
Sol:
𝒁𝟏𝟏= 𝒁𝟏+𝒁𝟑
270
= 𝟐.𝟓+𝟎.𝟐𝟓
= 𝟐.𝟕𝟓Ω
𝒁𝟏𝟐=𝒁𝟑=𝟎. 𝟐𝟓Ω
4. Find out h parameters of the circuit shown in the figure?
Soln:
𝑽𝟏=𝒉𝟏𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒉𝟏𝟐𝑽𝟐
𝑰𝟐=𝒉𝟐𝟏𝑰𝟏+𝒉𝟐𝟐𝑽𝟐
Writing KVL in LHS and RHS Loop
𝑽𝟏=𝟏𝟎𝑰𝟏+𝟐𝟎(𝑰𝟏+𝑰𝟐)−−−−−−(𝒊)
𝑽𝟐=𝟐𝟎(𝑰𝟐+𝑰𝟏)−−−−−−(𝒊𝒊)
Or 𝑽𝟏=𝟏𝟎𝑰𝟏+𝑽𝟐
At V2=0; 𝒉𝟏𝟏=𝑽𝟏/𝑰𝟏|𝑽𝟐=𝟎=𝟏𝟎
At V2=0; 𝒉𝟐𝟏=𝑰𝟐/𝑰𝟏|𝑽𝟐=𝟎=−𝟏
At I1=0; 𝒉𝟏𝟐=𝑽𝟏/𝑽𝟐|𝑰𝟏=𝟎=𝟏
At I1=0; 𝒉𝟐𝟐=𝑰𝟐/𝑽𝟐|𝑰𝟏=𝟎 =𝟏𝟐𝟎=𝟎.𝟎𝟓Ω
5. For the two-port network shown, fond the short-circuit admittance parameter matrix?
Soln. The short circuit admittance parameters of a two port π network:

𝒚𝟏𝟏 = 𝒚𝒂+𝒚𝒃 = 𝟏/𝟎.𝟓 + 𝟏/𝟎.𝟓 = 𝟒Ω
𝒚𝟏𝟐 = 𝒚𝟐𝟏 = −𝒚𝒃 = −𝟏/𝟎.𝟓 = −𝟐Ω
𝒚𝟐𝟐 = 𝒚𝒃+𝒚𝒄 = 𝟏/𝟎.𝟓 + 𝟏/𝟎.𝟓 = 𝟒Ω
5 Marks
1.Explain the concept of poles, zeros, their significance and necessary conditions for
driving point functions and transfer functions?
Solution:
271
System Poles and Zeros:
The transfer function provides a basis for determining important system response characteristics
without solving the complete differential equation. As defined, the transfer function is a rational
function in the complex variable s = σ + jω, that is
It is often convenient to factor the polynomials in the numerator and denominator, and to write
the transfer function in terms of those factors
Where the numerator and denominator polynomials, N(s) and D(s), have real coefficients defined
by the system’s differential equation and K = bm/an. As written in Eq. (2) the zi’s are the roots
of the equation
N(s) =0
and are defined to be the system zeros, and the pi’s are the roots of the equation
D(s) = 0,
and are defined to be the system poles. In Eq. (2) the factors in the numerator and denominator
are written so that when s = zi the numerator N(s) = 0 and the transfer function vanishes, that is
and similarly when s = pi the denominator polynomial D(s) = 0 and the value of the transfer
function becomes unbounded,
All of the coefficients of polynomials N(s) and D(s) are real, therefore the poles and zeros must
be either purely real, or appear in complex conjugate pairs. In general for the poles, either pi=σi,
or else pi, pi+1 = σi+jωi. The existence of a single complex pole without a corresponding
conjugate pole would generate complex coefficients in the polynomial D(s). Similarly, the
system zeros are either real or appear in complex conjugate pairs.
272
A system is characterized by its poles and zeros in the sense that they allow reconstruction of the
input/output differential equation. In general, the poles and zeros of a transfer function may be
complex, and the system dynamics may be represented graphically by plotting their locations on
the complex s-plane, whose axes represent the real and imaginary parts of the complex variable
s. Such plots are known as pole-zero plots. It is usual to mark a zero location by a circle (◦) and a
pole location a cross (×). The location of the poles and zeros provide qualitative insights into the
response characteristics of a system
System Stability: The stability of a linear system may be determined directly from its transfer
function. An nth order linear system is asymptotically stable only if all of the components in the
homogeneous response from a finite set of initial conditions decay to zero as time increases, or
Where the pi are the system poles. In a stable system all components of the homogeneous
response must decay to zero as time increases. If any pole has a positive real part there is a
component in the output that increases without bound, causing the system to be unstable.
In order for a linear system to be stable, all of its poles must have negative real parts that are they
must all lie within the left-half of the s-plane. An unstable pole, lying in the right half of the s-
plane, generates a component in the system homogeneous response that increases without bound
from any finite initial conditions.
A system having one or more poles lying on the imaginary axis of the s-plane has non-decaying
oscillatory components in its homogeneous response, and is defined to be marginally stable.
Properties of Driving Point (Positive Real) Functions:
These conditions are required to satisfy to be positive realness:
➢ Y(s) must be a rational function in s with real coefficients, i.e., the coefficients of
the numerator and denominator polynomials is real and positive.
➢ The poles and zeros of Y(s) have either negative or zero real parts, i.e., Y(s) not have
poles or zeros in the right half s plane.
➢ Poles of Y(s) on the imaginary axis must be simple and their residues must be real and
positive, i.e., Y(s) not has multiple poles or zeros on the jω axis. The same statement
applies to the poles of l/Y(s).
➢ The degrees of the numerator and denominator polynomials in Y(s) differ at most by 1.
Thus the number of finite poles and finite zeros of Y(s) differ at most by 1.
273
➢ The terms of lowest degree in the numerator and denominator polynomials of
Y(s) differ in degree at most by 1. So Y(s) has neither multiple poles nor zeros at the
origin.
➢ There are no missing terms in numerator and denominator polynomials unless all even or
all odd terms are missing.
2.What is two-port network? Obtain the Z, Y, Hybrid and ABCD parameters?
Solution:
A network containing two pairs of terminals is called as two port network.
Normally one pair of terminals coming together to supply power or to withdraw power or to
measure the parameters, are called as port. To achieve simplicity, the whole network is shown
with a single block.
A typical two port network is as shown below in fig (a)
Z-parameters can be defined by the following equations

V1 = Z11I1 + Z12I2 …………………… (1)
V2 = Z21I1 + Z22I2 …………………… (2)
In Matrix form:
Here, Z11 is the driving point impedance at port 1-11with 2-21open circuited. It can also be
called as open circuit input impedance.
Z21 is the transfer impedance at port 1-11with 2-21 open circuited. It can also be called as open
circuit forward transfer impedance.
Z12 is the transfer impedance at port 2-21 with 1-11open circuited. It can also be called as open
circuit reverse transfer impedance and
274
Z22 is the driving point impedance at port 2-21 with 1-11open circuited. It can also be called as
open circuit output impedance.
Network is
a) Reciprocal then V1/I2 (where I1 = 0) = V2/I1 (where I2 = 0) i.e., Z12 = Z21
b) Symmetrical then V1/I1 (where I2 = 0) = V2/I2 (where I1 = 0) i.e., Z11 = Z22
SHORT CIRCUIT ADMITTANCE PARAMETERS (Y-parameters):
Y-parameters can be defined by the following equations

I1 = Y11V1 + Y12V2 ………………. (1)
I2 = Y21V1 + Y22V2 ………………. (2)
In matrix form
If the network is
a) Reciprocal then I2/V1 (where V2 = 0) = I1/V2 (where V1 = 0) i.e. Y21 = Y12
b) Symmetrical then I1/ V1 (where V2 = 0) = I2/ V2 (where V1 = 0) i.e. Y11 = Y22
Hybrid Parameters (h-Parameters):
h-parameters can be defined by the following equations
In matrix form:
If port 2-21is short circuited, i.e. V2 = 0 then
h11 is called input impedance and h21 is called forward current gain.
275
If port 1-11is open circuited, i.e., I1=0 then
h22 is called output admittance and h12 is called reverse voltage gain.
ABCD Parameters:
ABCD parameters can be defined by the following equations
In matrix form
If port 2-21is open circuited i.e., I2=0 then
A is called reverse voltage ratio and C is known as transfer admittance.

If port 2-21is short circuited i.e., V2=0 then
B is called transfer impedance and D is called reverse current ratio.
3.Briefly discuss about network functions and network parameters?

Solution:
A network function is the Laplace transform of an impulse response. Its format is a ratio of two
polynomials of the complex frequencies. Consider the general two-port network shown in Figure
a. The terminal voltages and currents of the two-port can be related by two classes of network
functions, namely, the driving point functions and the transfer functions.
276
The driving point functions relate the voltage at a port to the current at the same port. Thus,
these functions are a property of a single port. For the input port the driving point impedance
function ZIN(s) is defined as
ZIN(s)=VIN(s)/IIN(s)
This function can be measured by observing the current IIN when the input port is driven by a
voltage source VIN. The driving point admittance function YIN(s) is the reciprocal of the
impedance function, and is given by
The output port driving point functions are denned in a similar way. The transfer
functions of the two-port relate the voltage (or current) at one port to the voltage (or
current) at the other port. The possible forms of transfer functions are:
6. The voltage transfer function, which is a ratio of one voltage to another voltage.
7. The current transfer function, which is a ratio of one current to another current.
8. The transfer impedance function, which is the ratio of a voltage to a current.
9. The transfer admittance function, which is the ratio of a current to a voltage.
The voltage transfer functions are defined with the output port an open circuit, as:
To evaluate the voltage gain, for example, the output voltage VO is measured with the input port
driven by a voltage source VIN. The other three types of transfer functions can be defined in a
similar manner. Of the four types of transfer functions, the voltage transfer function is the one
most often specified in the design of filters
277
The functions defined above, when realized using resistors, inductors, capacitors, and
active devices, can be shown to be the ratios of polynomials in s with real coefficients. This is
so because the network functions are obtained by solving simple algebraic node equations, which
involve at most the terms R, sL, sC and their reciprocals. The active device, if one exists, the
solution still involves only the addition and multiplication of simple terms, which can only lead
to a ratio of polynomials in s. In addition, all the coefficients of the numerator and denominator
polynomials will be real.
Thus, the general form of a network function is
and all the coefficients ai and bi are real. If the numerator and denominator polynomials are
factored, an alternate form of H(s) is obtained:
Where z1, z2, ..., zn are called the zeros of H(s), because H(s) = 0 when s = zi. The roots of
the denominator pl, p2, ..., pm are called the poles of H(s). It can be seen that H(s) = ∞ at
the poles, s = pi.
The poles and zeros can be plotted on the complex s plane (s = σ + jω), which has the real
part σ for the abscissa, and the imaginary part jω for the ordinate.
Properties of all Network Functions:
A consequence of this property is that complex poles (and zeros) must occur in conjugate
pairs. To demonstrate this fact consider a complex root at (s=-a–jb) which leads to the factor
(s+a+jb) in the network function. The jb term will make some of the coefficients complex in
278
the polynomial, unless the conjugate of the complex root at (s=-a+jb) is also present in the
polynomial. The product of a complex factor and its conjugate is which can be seen
to have real coefficients.
Further important properties of network functions are obtained by restricting the networks to
be stable, by which we mean that a bounded input excitation to the network must yield a
bounded response. Put differently, the output of a stable network cannot be made to increase
indefinitely by the application of a bounded input excitation. Passive networks are stable by
their very nature, since they do not contain energy sources that might inject additional energy
into the network. Active networks, however, do contain energy sources that could join
forces with the input excitation to make the output increase indefinitely. Such
unstable networks, however, have no use in the world of practical filters and are therefore
precluded from all our future discussions .
4.Explain the concept of two port network functions using transformed variables?
Solution:
• Consider a two port network with voltages and currents at ports 1-1’ and 2-2’ as V1(t),
I1(t) and V2(t), I2(t) respectively as shown in figure .
Network functions for Two-Port Network are as follows:

6 Driving point functions:
i. Driving point impedance functions
ii. Driving point admittance functions
7 Transfer Functions:
279
i. Voltage transfer functions
ii. Current transfer functions
iii. Transfer impedance functions
iv. Transfer admittance functions
Driving point impedance functions:

• The ratio of Laplace transform of voltage and current at port 1-1’ or 2-2’ is defined as driving
point impedance function.
• Thus there are two driving point impedance functions.
• At port 1-1’ denoted as Z11(s): Z11(s)= V1(s)/I1(s)
➢ At port 2-2’ denoted as Z22(s): Z22(s)= V2(s)/ I2(s)
Driving point admittance functions:

• The ratio of Laplace transform of current and voltage at port 1-1’ or 2-2’ is defined as
driving point admittance function.
Thus there are two driving point admittance functions.

Y11(s)=I1(s)/V1(s)
Y22(s)=I2(s)/V2(s)
Transfer Functions:
Voltage Transfer Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of voltage at one port and voltage at another
port. It is denoted as G(s).
G12(s) =V1(s)/V2(s) and G21(s) =V2(s)/V1(s)

Current Transfer Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of current at one port and current at another
port. It is denoted as (s).
12(s) = I1(s)/I2(s) and 21(s) =I2(s)/I1(s)

Transfer Impedance Function:
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of voltage at one port and current at another
port.
Z12(s)=V1(s)/I2(s) and Z21(s)=V2(s)/I1(s)

Transfer Admittance Function:
280
• It is defined as the ratio of Laplace transform of current at one port and voltage at another
port.
Y12(s) =I1(s)/V2(s) and Y21(s) =I2(s)/V1(s)
UNIT V
2 Marks
1. What is a low pass filter?
A low-pass filter (LPF) is a filter that passes signals with a frequency lower than a certain cutoff
frequency and attenuates signals with frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency. ... The filter is
sometimes called a high-cut filter or treble-cut filter in audio applications
2. What is a high pass filter?

A high-pass filter is a filter that passes high frequencies well, but attenuates
(Reduces the amplitude of) frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency.
3. What is the difference between low pass and high pass filters
A high-pass filter allows signals from a certain frequency and higher to pass-through. So, a low-
pass filter blocks what a high-pass filter allows, if their cutoff frequency is same. ... In a wave there are
two type of frequency called high and low frequency..
4. Give the applications of filter.

High-pass and low-pass filters are also used in digital image processing to perform
Transformations in the spatial frequency domain.
Most high-pass filters have zero gain (-inf dB) at DC. Such a high-pass filter with
very low cutoff frequency can be used to block DC from a signal that is undesired
in that signal (and pass nearly everything else). These are sometimes called DC
Blocking filters.
5. A constant k high pass filter is required for a cut-off frequency of 2500Hz. The
Resistance of load circuit is 600Ω. Determine the value of the components

281
Required.
3 Marks
1. Show that a series LR circuit is a low pass filter if the output is taken across the resistor.
Calculate the corner frequency f c if L = 2 mH and R = 10 k Ω.
Sol:
2. Determine what type of filter is in Fig. Calculate the corner frequency fc.
Sol:
282
3. Design a series RLC type bandpass filter with cutoff frequencies of 10 kHz and 11 kHz.
Assuming C = 80 pF, find R, L, and Q.
Sol:
4. Determine the range of frequencies that will be passed by a series RLC bandpass filter with
R = 10Ω, L = 25mH, and C = 0.4 μF. Find the quality factor.
Sol:
283
5 Marks
1. Wright short notes on filters?
Solution:
The concept of filters has been an integral part of the evolution of electrical engineering from the
beginning.
A filter is a circuit that is designed to pass signals with desired frequencies and reject or attenuate
others.
As a frequency-selective device, a filter can be used to limit the frequency spectrum of a signal
to some specified band of frequencies. Filters are the
Circuits used in radio and TV receivers to allow us to select one desired signal out of a multitude
of broadcast signals in the environment. A filter is a passive filter if it consists of only passive
elements R, L, and C. It is said to be an active filter if it consists of active elements (such as
transistors and op amps) in addition to passive elements R, L, and C. There are other kinds of
filters—such as digital filters, electromechanical filters, and microwave filters—which are
beyond the level of the text. As shown in Fig. , there are four types of filters whether passive or
active:
1. A low pass filter passes low frequencies and stops high frequencies, as shown ideally in Fig.
(a).
2. A high pass filter passes high frequencies and rejects low frequencies, as shown ideally in Fig.
(b).
3. A band pass filter passes frequencies within a frequency band and blocks or attenuates
frequencies outside the band, as shown ideally in Fig. (c).
4. A band stop filter passes frequencies outside a frequency band and blocks or attenuates
frequencies within the band, as shown ideally in Fig. (d).
284
2. Discuss the following terms?
a) Low pass filter
b) High pass filter
Solution:
Low pass Filter:
A typical low pass filter is formed when the output of an RC circuit is taken off the capacitor as
shown in Fig... The transfer function is
Note that H (0) = 1, H (∞) = 0. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|, along with the ideal
characteristic. The half-power frequency, which is equivalent to the corner frequency on the
Bode plots but in the context of filters is usually known as the cutoff frequency ωc, is obtained
by setting the magnitude of H(ω) equal to 1/√2, thus
285
The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the transfer function H drops in magnitude to
70.71% of its maximum value. It is also regarded as the frequency at which the power dissipated
in a circuit is half of its maximum value.
The cut-off frequency is also called the roll off frequency.
A low pass filter is designed to pass only frequencies from dc up to the cutoff frequency ωc.
A low pass filter can also be formed when the output of an RL circuit is taken off the resistor. Of
course, there are many other circuits for low pass filters.
High pass Filter:

A high pass filter is formed when the output of an RC circuit is taken off the resistor as shown in
286
Note that H (0) = 0, H (∞) = 1. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|. Again, the corner or cutoff
frequency is
A high pass filter is designed to pass all frequencies above its cutoff frequency ωc.
A high pass filter can also be formed when the output of an RL circuit is taken off the inductor.
3. Explain about band pass and band reject filters?
Solution:
287
Band pass Filter:
The RLC series resonant circuit provides a band pass filter when the output is taken off the
resistor as shown in Fig. The transfer function is
We observe that H (0) = 0, H (∞) = 0. Figure 14.36 shows the plot of |H (ω)|. The band pass filter
passes a band of frequencies (ω1 < ω < ω2) centered on ω0, the center frequency, which is given
by
A band pass filter is designed to pass all frequencies within a band of frequencies, ω1 < ω < ω2.
Since the band pass filter in Fig is a series resonant circuit, the half power frequencies, the
bandwidth, and the quality factor are determined as in Section. A band pass filter can also be
formed by cascading the low pass filter (where ω2 = ωc) with the high pass filter (where ω1 =
ωc).
288
Band stop Filter:
Filter that prevents a band of frequencies between two designated values (ω1 and ω2) from
passing is variably known as a band stop, band reject, or notch filter. A band stop filter is formed
when the output RLC series resonant circuit is taken off the LC series combination as shown in
Notice that H (0) = 1, H(∞) = 1. Figure shows the plot of |H (ω)|. Again, the center frequency is
given by
While the half-power frequencies, the bandwidth, and the quality factor is calculated using the
formulas in Section for a series resonant circuit. Here, ω0 is called the frequency of rejection,
while the corresponding bandwidth (B = ω2 −ω1) is known as the bandwidth of rejection. Thus,
289
A band stop filter is designed to stop or eliminate all frequencies within a band of frequencies,
ω1 < ω < ω2.
4. What is constant K filter?

Solution:
In constant k filters, z1 and z2 are opposite type of reactances.
z1z2 = k2
Where k is a constant independent of frequency.

There are two types of constant k type filters:
(i) constant k low pass filter
(ii) constant k high pass filter
Figure shows constant k low pass filter.
Let

(i) when
290
(ii) when
The passband starts at f = 0 and continues up to fC, the cutoff frequency. All the frequencies
above.
291
Cut off frequency fC are in the attenuation or stop band. Thus, the network is called a low-pass
filter.
We also know that in the pass band
In the attenuation band,
292
The variation of a and b is plotted in the Fig.
The attenuation is zero throughout the pass band but increases gradually from the cutoff
frequency. The phase shift b is zero at zero frequency and increases gradually through the pass
band, reaches p at cutoff frequency fC. It remains at p for all frequencies beyond fC.
Determination of characteristic impedance:
The characteristic impedance of low pass filter will be given by
293
The plots of characteristic impedance are shown in Fig.
z0T is real when f < fC i.e. in the pass band. If f = fC, z0T = 0 and for f > fC, z0T is imaginary in the
attenuation band, rising to infinite reactance at infinite frequency.
z0p is real when f < fC. If f = fC, z0p is finite and for f > fC, z0p is imaginary.
Constant k high pass filter is obtained by changing the positions of series and shunt arms of the
constant k low pass filter. Figure shows a constant k high pass filter.
294
Let
(i) when
(ii) when
295
The reactances z1 and z2 are shown in Fig.
The filter passes all the frequency beyond fC. All frequencies below the cutoff frequency lie in
attenuation or stop band. Hence the network is called a high pass filter.
5. Briefly discuss about m-derived filters?
Solution:
m-derived filters or m-type filters are a type of electronic filter designed using the image method.
They were invented by Otto Zobel in the early 1920s. This filter type was originally intended for
use with telephone multiplexing and was an improvement on the existing constant k type
filter. The main problem being addressed was the need to achieve a better match of the filter into
the terminating impedances. In general, all filters designed by the image method fail to give an
296
exact match, but the m-type filter is a big improvement with suitable choice of the parameter m.
The m-type filter section has a further advantage in that there is a rapid transition from the cut-
off frequency of the pass band to a pole of attenuation just inside the stop band. Despite these
advantages, there is a drawback with m-type filters; at frequencies past the pole of attenuation,
the response starts to rise again, and m-types have poor stop band rejection. For this reason,
filters designed using m-type sections are often designed as composite filters with a mixture of k-
type and m-type sections and different values of m at different points to get the optimum
performance from both types
The building block of m-derived filters, as with all image impedance filters, is the "L" network,
called a half-section and composed of a series impedance Z, and a shunt admittance Y. The m-
derived filter is a derivative of the constant k filter. The starting point of the design is the values
of Z and Y derived from the constant k prototype and are given by
Where k is the nominal impedance of the filter, or R0. The designer now multiplies Z and Y by
an arbitrary constant m (0 < m < 1). There are two different kinds of m-derived section; series
and shunt. To obtain the m-derived series half section, the designer determines the impedance
that must be added to 1/mY to make the image impedance ZiT the same as the image impedance
of the original constant k section. From the general formula for image impedance, the additional
impedance required can be shown to be
To obtain the m-derived shunt half section, an admittance is added to 1/mZ to make the image
impedance ZiΠ the same as the image impedance of the original half section. The additional
admittance required can be shown to be
The general arrangements of these circuits are shown in the diagrams to the right along with a
specific example of a low pass section.
297
A consequence of this design is that the m-derived half section will match a k-type section on
one side only. Also, an m-type section of one value of m will not match another m-type section
of another value of m except on the sides which offer the Zi of the k-type
Operating frequency
For the low-pass half section shown, the cut-off frequency of the m-type is the same as the k-
type and is given by
The pole of attenuation occurs at;
From this it is clear that smaller values of m will produce closer to the cut-off frequency and
hence will have a sharper cut-off. Despite this cut-off, it also brings the unwanted stop band
response of the m-type closer to the cut-off frequency, making it more difficult for this to be
filtered with subsequent sections. The value of m chosen is usually a compromise between these
conflicting requirements. There is also a practical limit to how small m can be made due to the
inherent resistance of the inductors. This has the effect of causing the pole of attenuation to be
less deep and the slope of cut-off to be less steep. This effect becomes more marked as is brought
closer to , and there ceases to be any improvement in response with an m of about 0.2 or less
Image impedance
The following expressions for image impedances are all referenced to the low-pass prototype
section. They are scaled to the nominal impedance R0 = 1, and the frequencies in those
expressions are all scaled to the cut-off frequency ωc = 1.
Series sections
The image impedances of the series section are given by
298
Shunt sections
The image impedances of the shunt section are given by
As with the k-type section, the image impedance of the m-type low-pass section is purely real
below the cut-off frequency and purely imaginary above it. From the chart it can be seen that in
the pass band the closest impedance match to a constant pure resistance termination occurs at
approximately m = 0.6
Transmission parameters
For an m-derived section in general the transmission parameters for a half-section are given by
and for n half-sections
For the particular example of the low-pass L section, the transmission parameters solve
differently in three frequency bands.
299
For the transmission is lossless:
Objective Questions with answers
UNIT I
1) In any linear network, the elements like inductor, resistor and capacitor always_________
a. Exhibit changes due to change in temperature
b. Exhibit changes due to change in voltage
c. Exhibit changes due to change in time
d. Remains constant irrespective of change in temperature, voltage and time
ANSWER: (d) Remains constant irrespective of change in temperature, voltage and time
2) Which type of networks allow the physical separability of the network elements (resistors, inductors
& capacitors) for analysis purpose?
a. Lumped Networks
b. Distributed Networks
c. Unilateral Networks
d. Bilateral Networks
ANSWER: (a) Lumped Networks
3) Which law plays a significant role in the loop analysis of the network?
a. KCL
b. KVL
c. Law of Superposition Theorem
d. None of the above
ANSWER: (b) KVL
300
4) How is the loop analysis different in application/functioning level as compared to Kirchoff’s law?
a. Utilization of loop currents instead of branch currents for writing equations

b. Capability of branch current to carry multiple networks
c. Reduction in the number of unknowns for complex networks
d. All of the above
ANSWER: (d) All of the above
5) Which theorem assists in replacement of an impedance branch over the network by the other network
comprising different circuit components, without affecting the V-I relations throughout the entire
network?
a. Superposition Theorem
b. Compensation Theorem
c. Substitution Theorem
d. Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
ANSWER: (a) Substitution Theorem
6) What should be done, if the dependent current and voltage sources are present in a circuit while
applying ‘Superposition Theorem’?
a. Replace them by open circuit
b. Replaced them by short circuit
c. Keep in their original form without replacing by either open or short circuits
ANSWER: Keep in their original form without replacing by either open or short circuits
7) Which is the correct sequential order of steps to be undertaken while applying Thevenin’s theorem?
A. Calculation of Thevenin’s equivalent voltage
B. Removal of branch impedance through which required current is to be estimated
C. Estimation of equivalent impedance between two terminals of the branch
D. Estimation of branch current by schematic representation of Thevenin’s equivalent circuit
a. A, C, B, D
b. B, A, C, D
c. D, A, C, B
d. B, C, D, A
ANSWER: B, A, C, D
9) Which among the below specified assertions are precisely related to the conditions applicable for a
path to be an improper subgraph?
A. Incidence of a single branch at a terminating node
B. Incidence of two branches at the remaining nodes
a. A is true & B is false
b. A is false & B is true
c. Both A & B are true
d. Both A & B are false
ANSWER: (c) Both A & B are true
10) How many number of minimum end nodes or terminal nodes are involved in a tree, according to its
properties?
a. Only one
b. Two
c. Four
d. Infinite
ANSWER: (b) Two
301
UNIT II
1. In a balanced three-phase system-delta load, if we assume the line voltage is VRY = V∠0⁰ as a
reference phasor. Then the source voltage VYB is?
a) V∠0⁰
b) V∠-120⁰
c) V∠120⁰
d) V∠240⁰
Answer: b
Explanation: As the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ is taken as a reference phasor. Then the source voltage
VYB is V∠-120⁰.
2. In the question 1, the source voltage VBR is?
a) V∠120⁰
b) V∠240⁰
c) V∠-240⁰
d) V∠-120⁰
Answer: c
Explanation: As the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ is taken as a reference phasor. Then the source voltage
VBR is V∠-240⁰.
3. In a delta-connected load, the relation between line voltage and the phase voltage is?
a) line voltage > phase voltage
b) line voltage < phase voltage
c) line voltage = phase voltage
d) line voltage >= phase voltage
Answer: c
Explanation: In a delta-connected load, the relation between line voltage and the phase voltage is line
voltage = phase voltage.
4. If the load impedance is Z∠Ø, the current (IR ) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-Ø
b) (V/Z)∠Ø
c) (V/Z)∠90-Ø
d) (V/Z)∠-90+Ø
Answer: a
Explanation: As the load impedance is Z∠Ø, the current flows in the three load impedances and the
current flowing in the R impedance is IR = VBR∠0⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-Ø.
5. In the question 4, the expression obtained for current (IY) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-120+Ø
302
b) (V/Z)∠120-Ø
c) (V/Z)∠120+Ø
d) (V/Z)∠-120-Ø
Answer: d
current flowing in the Y impedance is IY = VYB∠120⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-120-Ø.
6. In the question 4, the expression obtained for current (IB) is?
a) (V/Z)∠-240+Ø
b) (V/Z)∠-240-Ø
c) (V/Z)∠240-Ø
d) (V/Z)∠240+Ø
Answer: b
current flowing in the B impedance is IB = VBR∠240⁰/Z∠Ø = (V/Z)∠-240-Ø.
7. A three phase, balanced delta connected load of (4+j8) Ω is connected across a 400V, 3 – Ø balanced
supply. Determine the phase current IR . Assume the phase sequence to be RYB.
a) 44.74∠-63.4⁰A
b) 44.74∠63.4⁰A
c) 45.74∠-63.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠63.4⁰A
Answer: a
Explanation: Taking the line voltage VRY = V∠0⁰ as a reference VRY = 400∠0⁰V, VYB = 400∠-120⁰V and
VBR = 400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8) Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IR =
(400∠0o)/(8.94∠63.4o )= 44.74∠-63.4⁰A.
8. In the question 7, determine the phase current IY.
a) 44.74∠183.4⁰A
b) 45.74∠183.4⁰A
c) 44.74∠183.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠-183.4⁰A
Answer: c
VBR = 400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8)Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IY =
(400∠120o)/(8.94∠63.4o )= 44.74∠-183.4⁰A.
9. In the question 7, determine the phase current IB.
a) 44.74∠303.4⁰A
b) 44.74∠-303.4⁰A
303
c) 45.74∠303.4⁰A
d) 45.74∠-303.4⁰A
Answer: b
VBR = 400∠-240⁰V. Impedance per phase = (4+j8) Ω = 8.94∠63.4⁰Ω. Phase current IB =
(400∠240o)/(8.94∠63.4o)= 44.74∠-303.4⁰A.
10. Determine the power (kW) drawn by the load.
a) 21
b) 22
c) 23
d) 24
Answer: d
Explanation: Power is defined as the product of voltage and current. So the power drawn by the load is P
= 3VPhIPhcosØ = 24kW.
UNIT III
1. The current in the R-L circuit at a time t = 0+ is?

a) V/R
b) R/V
c) V
d) R
Answer: a
Explanation: The capacitor never allows sudden changes in voltage, it will act as a short circuit at t = 0+.
So the current in the circuit at t = 0+ is V/R.
2. The expression of current in R- C circuit is?
a) i=(V/R)exp⁡(t/RC )
b) i=(V/R)exp⁡(-t/RC )
c) i=(V/R)-exp(⁡t/RC )
d) i=(V/R)-exp⁡(-t/RC )
Answer: b
Explanation: The particular solution of the current equation is zero. So the expression of current in R- C
circuit is i=(V/R)exp⁡(-t/RC ).
3. In an R-C circuit, when the switch is closed, the response ____________
a) do not vary with time
b) decays with time
c) rises with time
d) first increases and then decrease
304
Answer: b
Explanation: In a R-C circuit, when the switch is closed, the response decays with time that is the
response V/R decreases with increase in time.
4. The time constant of an R-C circuit is?
a) RC
b) R/C
c) R
d) C
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The time constant of an R-C circuit is RC and it is denoted by τ and the value of τ in dc
response of R-C circuit is RC sec.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer: d
Explanation: After five time constants, the transient part of the response reaches more than 99 percent of
its final value.
6.A series R-C circuit consists of resistor of 10 and capacitor of 0.1F as shown in the figure. A constant
voltage of 20V is applied to the circuit at t = 0. What is the current in the circuit at t = 0?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer: b
Explanation: At t = 0, switch S is closed. Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltage,
the current in the circuit is i = V/R = 20/10 = 2A. At t = 0, i = 2A.
7. The expression of current obtained from the circuit in terms of differentiation from the circuit shown in
the question 6?
305
a) di/dt+i=1
b) di/dt+i=2
c) di/dt+i=3
d) di/dt+i=0
Answer: d
Explanation: By applying Kirchhoff’s law, we get
Differentiating with respect to t, we get 10 di/dt+i/0.1=0 => di/dt+i=0.

8. The current equation in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) i=2(e-2t)A
b) i=2(e2t)A
c) i=2(-e-2t)A
d) i=2(-e2t)A
Answer: a
Explanation: At t = 0, switch S is closed. Since the capacitor does not allow sudden changes in voltage,
the current in the circuit is i = V/R = 20/10 = 2A. At t = 0, i = 2A. The current equation is i=2(e-2t)A.
a) VR =20(et)V
b) VR =20(-e-t)V
c) VR =20(-et)V
d) VR =20(e-t)V
Answer: d
Explanation: The expression of voltage across resistor in the circuit is VR = iR =(2(e-t ) )×10=20(e-t )V.
10. Determine the voltage across the capacitor in the circuit shown in the question 6 is?
a) VC =60(1-e-t )V
b) VC =60(1+et )V
c) VC =60(1-et )V
d) VC =60(1+e-t )V
Answer: a
Explanation: The expression of voltage across capacitor in the circuit VC = V(1-e-t/RC) =20(1-e-t)V.
UNIT IV
1) Which among the following represents the precise condition of reciprocity for transmission
parameters?
306
a. AB - CD = 1
b. AD – BC = 1
c. AC – BD = 1
ANSWER: AD – BC = 1
No explanation is available for this question!
2) If the two ports are connected in cascade configuration, then which arithmetic operation should be performed between
individual transmission parameters in order to determine overall transmission parameters?
a. Addition
b. Subtraction
c. Multiplication
d. Division
ANSWER: Multiplication
3) Which is the correct condition of symmetry observed in z-parameters?
a. z11 = z22
b. z11 = z12
c. z12 = z22
d. z12 = z21
ANSWER: z11 = z22
4) An open circuit reverse voltage gain in h-parameters is a unitless quantity and generally equivalent to ________
a. V1 / I1 (keeping V2 = 0)
b. I2 / I1 (keeping V2 = 0)
c. V1 / V2 (keeping I1 = 0)
d. I2 / V2 (keeping I1 = 0)
ANSWER: V1 / V2 (keeping I1 = 0)
307
5) How is the short circuit reverse transfer admittance (y12) calculated in terms of current and voltage ratio?
a. V2/ I1 (keeping I2 = 0)
b. I2/ V1 (keeping V2 = 0)
c. I1/ V2 (keeping V1 = 0)
d. V1/ I2 (keeping I1 = 0)
ANSWER: I1/ V2 (keeping V1 = 0)
6) Which among the following is regarded as short circuit forward transfer admittance?
a. y11
b. y12
c. y21
d. y22
ANSWER: y21
7) Which elements act as an independent variables in Y-parameters?
a. Current
b. Voltage
c. Both a and b
ANSWER: Voltage
8) What does the connectivity of energy source at the port of network known as?
a. Driving Point
b. Transfer Point
308
c. Both a and b
ANSWER: Driving Point
UNIT V
1) What is an ideal value of attenuation for the frequencies in pass band especially for a cascade configuration
a. Zero
b. Unity
c. Infinity
d. Unpredictable
ANSWER: Zero
: No explanation is available for this question!
2) It is possible to overcome the drawback of m-derived filter by connecting number of sections in addition to p
& m-derived sections with terminating __________
a. One-fourth sections
b. Half sections
c. Square of three-fourth sections
d. Full sections
3) Which value of 'm' is selected in a composite filter, while connecting the terminating sections in order to acq
proper impedance matching and constant characteristic impedance throughout the passband?
a. 0.3
b. 0.6
c. 0.9
d. 0.12
ANSWER: 0.6
309
4) In band elimination filter, the frequency of resonance of individual arms is geometric _________
a. Mean of two cut-off frequencies

b. Difference of two cut-off frequencies
c. Product of two cut-off frequencies
d. Division of two cut-off frequencies
ANSWER: Mean of two cut-off frequencies
5) For the design of prototype high pass filter T section, what would be the value of inductor if design impedan
cut-off frequency are 600 ohm and 1500 Hz respectively?
a. 19.89 mH
b. 31.83 mH
c. 40.13 mH
d. 51.83 mH
ANSWER: 31.83 mH
6) What do the high pass filters generally comprise of?
A. Capacitive series arm

B. Capacitive shunt arm
C. Inductive series arm
310
D. Inductive shunt arm
a. A & D
b. A & C
c. B & C
d. B & D
ANSWER: A & D
7) Referring to the characteristics of π-section low pass filter given below, what would be the phase shift at 2kH
pass band?
a. 0.7731 radian
b. 1.0471 radian
c. 2.551 radian
d. 3.991 radian
ANSWER: 1.0471 radian
8) For a constant k type LPF with T- section, with the cut-off frequency of about 4kHz, what will be the value of
band attenuation at 8 kHz?
311
a. 10.03 dB
b. 22.87 dB
c. 35.04 dB
d. 50.02 dB
ANSWER: 22.87 dB
9) While designing a constant-k low pass filter (T-section) shown below, what would be the value of capacitor i
20mH, R0 = 500 Ω and fc = 5 kHz?
a. 0.0635 μF
b. 0.10 μF
c. 0.1273 μF
d. 0.20 μF
312
ANSWER: 0.1273 μF
10) Which type of filter is shown below?
a. Low pass filter

b. High pass filter
c. Band pass filter
d. Band elimination filter
ANSWER: Band elimination filter
313
17. beyond syllabus Topics with material
The Effect of Symmetry on the Fourier Coefficients
The Effect of Symmetry
1. Even-function symmetry
2. Odd-function symmetry
3. Half-wave symmetry
4. Quarter-wave symmetry
Even-Function Symmetry
A function is defined to be even if and only if
f(t) = f(-t) 1.1
If a function satisfies Eq. 1.1, then it is said to be even because polynomial functions with
only even exponents have this type of behavior. For any even periodic functions, the equations for the
Fourier coefficients simplify to the following:
av=2T∫T/20f(t)dt.av=2T∫0T/2f(t)dt.
(1.2)
ak=4T∫T/20f(t)coskω0tdt.ak=4T∫0T/2f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt.
(1.3)
bk=0bk=0
for all k (1.4)
Noting for Eq. 1.4, that all b coefficients are zero if the function is even. Below, Fig. 1.1 depicts an
even periodic function. The two derivatives below follow exactly from Eq. 1.2 - 1.4. Through each
derivation,
t0=−T/2t0=−T/2
is selected and then we break the interval of integration into the range from -T/2 to 0 and 0 to T/2, or as
follows
av=1T∫T/2−T/2f(t)dtav=1T∫−T/2T/2f(t)dt
=1T∫0−T/2f(t)dt+∫T/20f(t)dt.=1T∫−T/20f(t)dt+∫0T/2f(t)dt.
(1.5)
314
Figure 1.1 Even function of f(t) = f(-t)
Now, the variable of integration must be changed in the first integral on the right-hand side of Eq. 1.5.
Particularly, we can let t = - x and observe that f(t) = f(-x) = f(x) due to the fact that the function is even.
Also noting that x = T/2 when t = - T/2 and dt = -dx. Thus
∫0−T/2f(t)dt=∫0T/2f(x)(−dx)=∫T/20f(x)dx.∫−T/20f(t)dt=∫T/20f(x)(−dx)=∫0T/2f(x)dx.
(1.6)
which does show that integrating from -T/2 to 0 is the same as integrating from 0 to T/2. Thus Eq. 1.5
is the same as Eq. 1.2. Deriving Eq. 1.3 can be completed as follows:
ak=2T∫0−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt+2T∫T/20coskω0tdtak=2T∫−T/20f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt+2T∫0T/2cos⁡kω0tdt
(1.7)
however
∫0−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt=∫0T/2f(x)cos(−kω0x)(−dx)∫−T/20f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt=∫T/20f(x)cos⁡(−kω0x)(−dx)
=−∫T/20f(x)coskω0xdx.=−∫0T/2f(x)cos⁡kω0xdx.
(1.8)
Similarly, as before, integrating from -T/2 to 0 is identical as integrating from 0 to T/2. By combining
Eq. 1.7 with Eq. 1.8, Eq. 1.3 is produced. After this, all the b coefficients are zero when f(t) is an even
315
periodic function, because integrating from -T/2 to 0 is the exact negative of the integration from 0
to T/2. Thus,
∫0−T/2f(t)sinkω0tdt=∫0T/2f(x)sin(−kω0x)(−dx)∫−T/20f(t)sin⁡kω0tdt=∫T/20f(x)sin⁡(−kω0x)(−dx)
=−∫T/20f(x)sinkω0xdx.=−∫0T/2f(x)sin⁡kω0xdx.
(1.9)
Now, if Eqs. 1.2 and 1.3 are used to find the Fourier coefficients, the integration interval must be
between 0 and T/2.
Odd-Function Symmetry
A periodic function is defined to be odd if
f(t) = -f(t) (1.10)
A Function that satisfies Eq. 1.10 is said to be odd due to the fact that polynomial functions with only
odd exponents behave this way. The expressions for the Fourier coefficients are as follows
av=0;av=0;
(1.11)
ak=0,ak=0,
for all k; (1.12)
bk=4T∫T/20f(t)sinkω0dt.bk=4T∫0T/2f(t)sin⁡kω0dt.
(1.13)
316
Figure 1.2
Looking at Eqs. 1.11 - 1.13, all the a coefficients are zero if the periodic function is odd. The figure
shown above illustrates an odd periodic function. The same method of derivation is used on Eqs. 1.11 -
1.13 as was used in the derivation of Eqs. 1.2 - 1.4.
The evenness (oddness) of a function can be dismantled by shifting the periodic function along the time
axis. Essentially this means that the wise choice of where t = 0 might give a function either odd or even
symmetry. For instance, the triangular function in Fig 1.3 (a) is not even or odd. Nevertheless, the
function can be made even, as illustrated in Fig 1.3 (b), or odd, as shown in Fig 1.3 (c).
Figure 1.3
Half-Wave Symmetry
A function is said to have half-wave symmetry if it satisfies the following constraint:
f(t) = -f(t - T/2) (1.14)
Equation 1.14 expresses that a periodic function has a half-wave symmetry if, after it has been
shifted by one-half of a period and inverted, it is said to be identical to the original periodic
function. For instance, the periodic functions illustrated in Figures 1.2 and 1.3 possess half-
317
wave symmetry, whereas those functions in Figures 1.4 and 1.5 do not possess such symmetry.
For t = 0, the half-wave symmetry does not exist as a function.
If a given function does possess a half-wave symmetry, both ak and bk are defined as zero for
an even value of k. Similarly, av is also zero due to the fact that an average value of a periodic
function with this symmetry is zero. Expressions for the Fourier coefficients are as follows:
av=0,av=0,
(1.15)
ak=0,ak=0,
for k even (1.16)
ak=4T∫T/20f(t)coskω0tdt,ak=4T∫0T/2f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt,
for k odd (1.17)
bk=0,bk=0,
for k even (1.18)
bk=4T∫T/20f(t)sinkω0tdt,bk=4T∫0T/2f(t)sin⁡kω0tdt,
for k odd (1.19)
The equations are derived from starting with Eqs 1.2 - 1.4 from the previous article, Learn
About Fourier Coefficients. An interval of integration from -T/2 to T/2 is chosen and then this
range is divided into the intervals -T/2 to 0 and 0 to T/2.
ak=2T∫t0+Tt0f(t)coskω0tdtak=2T∫t0t0+Tf(t)cos⁡kω0tdt
=2T∫T/2−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt=2T∫−T/2T/2f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt
=2T∫0−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt=2T∫−T/20f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt
+2T∫T/20f(t)coskω0tdt+2T∫0T/2f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt
(1.20)
From here, the variable in the first integral on the right-hand side is changed.
t = x - T/2
Then
x = T/2, if t = 0
x = 0, if t = -T/2;
dt = dx
Rewriting the first integral,
∫0−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt=∫T/20f(x−T/2)coskω0(x−T/2)dx∫−T/20f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt=∫0T/2f(x−T/2)cos⁡k
ω0(x−T/2)dx
(1.21)
318
Considering that
coskω0(x−T/2)=cos(kω0x−kπ)=coskπcoskω0xcos⁡kω0(x−T/2)=cos⁡(kω0x−kπ)=cos⁡kπcos⁡k
ω0x
and, by postulating,
f(x - T/2) = -f(Ix)
Thus Eq. 1.21 can now be written as
∫0−T/2f(t)coskω0tdt=∫T/20[−f(x)]coskω0tdt∫−T/20f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt=∫0T/2[−f(x)]cos⁡kω0tdt
(1.22)
By including Eq. 1.22 into Eq 1.20,

ak=2T(1−coskπ)∫T/20f(t)coskω0tdtak=2T(1−cos⁡kπ)∫0T/2f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt
(1.23)
However,
coskπcos⁡kπ
is equal to 1 if k is even and -1 if k is odd.
To summarize, the representation of the Fourier series of a periodic function with a half-wave
symmetry zero average value and only contains odd harmonics.
Quarter-Wave Symmetry
If a function has half-wave symmetry and symmetry about the midpoint of the
positive and negative half-cycles, the periodic function is said to have quarter--wave
symmetry. This function is illustrated in Figure 1.4; the function in Fig 1.4(a) is said to have
quarter-wave symmetry about the midpoint of the positive and negative half-cycles. The
function in Fig 1.4(b) does not have this symmetry, but it does have half-wave symmetry.
319
Figure 1.4
A function that possesses quarter-wave symmetry always can be made even or odd by
choosing where t = 0. For instance, the periodic function in Fig. 1.4(a) is odd and can be
turned into an even function by shifting over T/4 unites either left or right along the t-axis.
However, because the periodic function in Fig. 1.4(b) only possesses half-wave symmetry, it
cannot ever be made even or odd.
If the periodic function were to be made even, then
av=0,av=0,
due to half-wave symmetry
ak=0,ak=0,
for k even, due to half-wave symmetry
ak=8T∫T/40f(t)coskω0tdt,ak=8T∫0T/4f(t)cos⁡kω0tdt,
for k odd
bk=0,bk=0,
for all k, because the periodic function is even (1.24)
The above Eqs. 1.24 are the results from the periodic function's symmetry in addition to it
being even. If the quarter-wave symmetry is super-imposed on half-wave
symmetry, av and ak for k even can therefore be eliminated. Taking a look at the expression
320
for ak and k odd, Eq. 1.19 demonstrates that when combining a quarter-wave symmetry with
evenness, the range of integration shortens from 0 to T/2 to 0 to T/4.
If a quarter-wave symmetric periodic function is made odd,
av=0,av=0,
due to the function being odd
ak=0,ak=0,
for all k, due to the function being odd
bk=0,bk=0,
for k even, due to half-wae symmetry
bk=8T∫T/40f(t)sinkω0tdt,bk=8T∫0T/4f(t)sin⁡kω0tdt,
for k odd (1.25)
The above Eqs of 1.25 come consequently because of quarter-wave symmetry as well as
oddness. Similarly to the evenness, the quarter-wave symmetry allows for the interval of
integration from 0 to T/2 to 0 to T/4 to be shortened.
Coming Up
As of now, you should have a better understanding of the Fourier coefficients and the different
types of symmetry that can happen. These five types, even, odd, half-wave, quarter-wave half-
wave even, and quarter-wave half-wave odd are all used to simplify the computation of the
Fourier coefficients. A few topics that will be covered next will go in depth to find the steady-
state response of a linear circuit from a Fourier series, calculation average power with periodic
functions, as well as the rms value of such periodic functions.
321

Ii I NT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ii I NT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Course File On

Mrs.CH.Hima Bindu Sagarika

COURSE FILE CONTENTS

• To provide a progressive environment for learning through organized teaching methodologies,

(C) PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

PO 3: Design/development of solutions: design solutions for complex engineering problems

PO 4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: use research based knowledge and

PO 7: Environment sustainability: understand the impact of the professional engineering

PO 9: Individual and team work: function effectively as an individual and as a member or

PO 10: Communication: communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with

(E) PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

JAWAHARLAL NEHRU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

• “N. C. Jagan & C. Lakshminarayana”, “Network Theory”, B.S Publications, 2014.

• “A. Chakrabarthy”, Circuit Theory, Dhanpat Rai, 2005.

• “K. Rajeswaran”, “Electric Circuit theory”, Pearson Education, 2004.

• “A. Bruce Carlson”, “Circuits”, Thomson Publishers, 1999

(A). COURSE OBJECTIVES

➢ To understand Magnetic Circuits, Network Topology and Three phase circuits.

➢ To analyze transients in Electrical systems.

➢ To evaluate Network parameters of given Electrical network

➢ To design basic filter configurations

(B). COURSE OUTCOMES

➢ Analyze the Electrical Circuits with the concept of Network topology

➢ Apply the concepts of Magnetic circuit & Analyze Magnetic circuits

➢ Analyze the transient behavior of electrical networks for various excitations

➢ Represent the transfer function for the given network

➢ Determine the parameters for the design of various filters

S.N. TOPIC TOPIC OUTCOMES

5 Composite magnetic circuit - Student analyze the concept of Composite

21 Transient Analysis: Introduction,Student can Transient Response of RL circuit

30 Problems on Transient response of An ability to do the calculations on RL RC

31 NETWORK FUNCTIONS: Student will understand the network

35 Z, Y, ABCD and hybridWill know the relations of parameters

36 Z, Y, ABCD and hybrid parameters Will know the relations of parameters

6. A). COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Unit Details Hours

Contact classes for syllabus coverage 47

1 Human Factors Engineering: Study of human machine 1 period (Class Room)

6. D). TOPICS BEYOND SYLLABUS/ADVANCED TOPICS:

4. E). WEB SOURCE REFERENCES:

Sl. Name of book/ website

6. F). DELIVERY/INSTRUCTIONAL METHODOLOGIES:

 CHALK & TALK  STUD. ASSIGNMENT  WEB RESOURCES

6. G). ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGIES-DIRECT

 ASSIGNMENTS  STUD.  TESTS/MODEL  UNIV.

6. H). ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGIES-INDIRECT

S.No. Topic Scheduled date Actual date

4 Dot convention & coefficient of coupling

12 Three phase circuits: Phase sequence

13 Star and delta connection – Relation

18 Measurement of active and reactive power

21 Transient Analysis: Introduction, Transient

31 NETWORK FUNCTIONS: Network

39 Unit-V: FILTERS: Introduction to filters

41 Band pass and Band stop filters

46 Composite filter design

47 Composite filter design

Subject NETWORK THEORY

Introduction to Network Theory 1

II Three Phase Circuits 2 2 3 9

Transient Analysis (DC) 7 6 4 5

Electrical current flowing along a wire creates a

Similarly, if we calculate the induced EMF in coil 1, due to change in current